Digital PDFs

AA-N623C-TK

November 1985

242 pages

Original

20MB

Document:	Terminal Subsystem Manual
Order Number:	AA-N623C-TK
Revision:	0
Pages:	242
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/pdp11/pro3xx/POS/AA-N623C-TK_Terminal_Subsystem_Manual_198511.pdf

OCR Text

Terminal Subsystem
Manual
Order No. AA-N623C-TK

November 1985

This manual describes the Professional's Terminal
Subsystem, providing detailed reference information.

REQUIRED SOFTWARE:

Professional Host Tool Kit V3.0,
or PRO/Tool Kit V3.0

OPERATING SYSTEM:

P/OS V3.0

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754-2571

First Printing, December
Updated, September
Updated, December
Revised, November

1982
1983
1983
1985

The information in this document is subject to change without
notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital
Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no
responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a
license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the
terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed
software on equipment that
affiliated companies.

for the use or reliability of
is not supplied by DIGITAL or its

The specifications and drawings, herein,
are the property of
Digital Equipment Corporation and shall not be reproduced or
copied or used in whole or in part as the basis for the
manufacture or sale of items without written permission.
Copyright © 1985 by Digital Equipment Corporation
All Rights Reserved
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
CTI BUS
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL
~omoomoTM

MAS SB US
PDP
P/OS
PRO/BASIC
PRO/Communications
Professional
PRO/FMS
PRO/RMS
PROSE
PROSE PLUS

Rainbow
RSTS
RSX
Tool Kit
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

CONTENTS
PREFACE

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION TO THE TERMINAL SUBSYSTEM

1.1
COMPARISON OF TEXT MODE AND GRAPHICS MODE
1-2
1.2
ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS
1-4
1. 2 .1
Native Mode
1-6
1. 2. 2
Terminal Emulation Modes . .
1-9
1.2.2.1
VTlOa Mode - Level 1 . . .
1-9
1.2.2.2
VT200 Mode, 7-Bit Controls - Level 2
1-10
1.2.2.3
VT200 Mode, 8-Bit Controls - Level 2
1-11
1.2.2.4
VT52 Mode
1-11
CHARACTER ENCODING
1. 3
1-11
1. 3 .1
Coding Standards
1-11
1. 3. 2
Code Table .
1-13
1.3.2.1
7-Bit Code Table .
1-14
1.3.2.2
8-Bit Code Table
1-16
The Professional Character Sets
1. 3. 3
1-19
1.3.3.1
DEC Multinational Character Set
1-19
1.3.3.2
DEC Special Character Set
1-20
DEC Technical Character Set
1.3.3.3
1-21
1. 4
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
. . . .
1-26
1. 4 .1
Control Characters
1-26
1. 4. 2
Escape Sequences .
1-27
1. 4. 3
Control Sequences
1-28
1. 5
WORKING WITH 7- AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS
1-28
1. 5 .1
Conventions for Codes Transmitted from
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
1. 5. 2
Conventions for Codes Transmitted/Returned
to Application . . .
1-30
Native Mode
1.5.2.1
1-30
Terminal Emulation Mode
1.5.2.2
1-31
CHAPTER 2

CODES TRANSMITTED FROM KEYBOARD

2.1
MODES OF OPERATION AND KEY USAGE
2 .1.1
Native Mode
2 .1. 2
Terminal Emulation Mode
VT100 Mode
2.1.2.1
2 .1. 3
VT200 Mode .
VT52 Mode
2 .1. 4
STANDARD KEYS
2.2
2.2.1
<SHIFT> Key, <LOCK> Key,
Shift-Lock/Caps-Lock Mode
2.2.2
Office Mode and Data Processing Mode
2.3
COMPOSE SEQUENCES
. . . . . . . .
iii

2-2
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7

2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.9
2.10
2.11

CHAPTER 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3. 5. 4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
3.5.13
3.5.14
3.5.15
3.5.16
3.5.17
3.5.18
3.5.19
3.5.20
3.5.21
3.5.22
3.5.23
3.5.24
3.5.25

Creating a Three-Stroke Compose Sequence .
Creating a Two-Stroke Compose Sequence . .
Aborting or Restarting a Compose Sequence
More about Dead Keys . . . . . . .
KEYS USED TO GENERATE 7-BIT CONTROL
.
CHARACTERS . . .
TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS
EDITING KEYPAD .
Editing Keys .
Cursor Control Keys
AUXILIARY KEYPAD . . . . . . . .
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE KEYBOARD
Locking the Keyboard . . . . . . .
.
Unlocking the Keyboard . . . . . .
ENABLING AND DISABLING AUTOREPEAT
BELL SIGNAL
MONITOR SCREEN BLANKING AND RESTORE

2-8
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-15
2-18
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-28

RESPONSE OF PROFESSIONAL TO RECEIVED CODES
GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
CONTROL CHARACTERS
ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCE OVERVI~W
ERROR RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
.
Select Compatibility Level - DECSCL
Code Extension Announcers
Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection
Scrolling
. . . .
Scrolling Region .
Origin . . . . . .
Cursor Positioning
Cursor characteristics
Tab Stops
Columns per Line .
Auto-Wrap
. . . .
Screen Background
Linefeed/Newline .
Keyboard Action
Autorepeat . . . .
Local Echo (Keyboard Send-Receive)
Cursor Key Character Selection . .
Auxiliary Keypad Character Selection
Character Sets and Selection . . .
Character Rendition and Attributes
Line Attributes
..
Erasing
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edi ting
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Inserting and Replacing Characters
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4
3-4
3-9
3-10
3-14
3-14
3-17
3-17
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-38
3-45
3-48
3-49
3-52
3-53
3-54

3.5.26
3.5.27
3.5.28
3.5.29
3.5.30
3.5.31
3.5.32
3.5.33

CHAPTER 4

Printer Extent . . . . . . . .
Print Termination Character
Print Screen (Text or Graphics Mode)
Reports
Reset
Interlace
Tests and Adjustments
ANSI/VT52 Compatibility

3-56
. 3-57
3-57
3-58
3-62
3-66
3-67
. . 3-67

RESPONSE OF PROFESSIONAL TO CONTROL STRINGS

4.1
4 .1.1
4 .1. 2

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS . . . . . .
ReGIS Graphics
. . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets
(DRCS) . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2.1
Designing a Character Set . . . .
4.1.2.2
Design Considerations
. . . .
4.1.2.3
Down-Line Loading a DRCS Character Set
4.1.2.4
Clearing a Down-Line Loaded Character
Set
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 .1. 3
Sixel Graphics (VT200 terminal emulation
mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3.1
Sixel Device Control String Format
4.1.3.2
Control Characters in Sixel Data
4.1.3.3
Color in Sixel Data
4.1.3.4
Example of Sixel Data Stream
4 .1. 4
User Defined Keys (DECUDK)
4.1.4.1
DECUDK Device Control String Format
4.1.4.2
Advice When Loading Keys . . . . . .
4.1.4.3
DECUDK Example . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2
(OSC) - OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL STRINGS
4.3
PM - PRIVACY MESSAGE CONTROL STRINGS
4.4
APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS
4. 4 .1
Remote Task Spawning with APC strings
4. 4. 2
Remote Task Communication with APC Strings
4. 4. 3
Message Identification Suppression . . . .

4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-9
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-28

APPENDIX A

CHARACTER SET SUMMARY

APPENDIX B

KEYBOARD ILLUSTRATIONS

APPENDIX C

TEXT AND GRAPHICS MODE INTERACTION - NATIVE MODE

APPENDIX D

DIFFERENCES IN EMULATED FEATURES

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL
D-1
Seven- and Eight-Bit Support
D-1
Communications . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Key boa rd . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Codes Transmitted from Keyboard to
Application . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Response of "Terminal" to Received Codes
D-3
D.1. 5
Control Characters
D-3
D.1.5.1
Control Strings
. . . . .
D.1.5.2
D-3
Control Sequences
. . . . .
D.1.5.3
D-4
Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection D-4
D.1.5.4
Scrolling . . . . . . . . .
D.1.5.5
D-4
Cursor Characteristics . . .
D.1.5.6
D-4
D.1.5. 7
Character Sets and Selection
D-5
Character Attributes
D-5
D.1.5.8
Reverse Video
D-5
Bold .
D-5
Blink
D-6
D.1.5.9
Printing . . . .
D-6
Printer Controller Mode
D-6
Printer Form Feed Mode (DECPFF)
D-6
Print Screen (Text or Graphics Mode)
D-7
Reports
. . . . . . . . . .
D-7
D.1.5.10
Device Status Report (DSR)
D-7
Device Attributes (DA)
D-7
D.1.5.11
Reset
. . . . . . .
D-7
D.1.5.12
Interlace
. . . . . .
D-8
D.1.5.13
Tests and Adjustments
D-8
D.1.5.14
Keyboard Indicator .
D-8
D.1. 6
Other Features . . . .
D-8
VT200 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT220 TERMINAL
D-9
D.2
D-9
D.2.1
Keyboard . . . .
PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
D-9
D.3
Image Distortion Factors
D-10
D.3.1
Distortion Scaling
D-10
D.3.1.1
D-10
D.3.1.2
Pattern Registration
D-11
D.3.2
Shading Differences
D-11
D.3.2.1
Two New Shading Options
D-11
Character Shading and Text Attributes
D.3.2.2
Screen-Addressing Considerations
D-11
D.3.3
Pixel-Aspect Ratio
.....
D-11
D.3.3.1
General Screen-Scaling Method
D-11
D.3.3.2
Decimal-Fraction
Support
D-12
D.3.3.3
D-12
D.3.3.4
Clipping Offscreen Areas
Graphics
Processor
Memory
Position
Stack
D.3.3.5
D-12
size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling
Differences
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-13
D.3.4
Text/Graphics
Independent
Scrolling
D-13
D.3.4.1
D-13
D.3.4.2
No Wrap-Around Scrolling
. . ...
D.1
D.1.1
D.1. 2
D.1. 3
D.1. 4

D.3.4.3
D.3.5
D.3.5.1
D.3.5.2
D.3.5.3
D.3.5.4
D.3.5.5
D.3.5.6
D.3.6
D.3.6.1
D.3.6.2
D.3.7
D.3.7.1
D.3.7.2
D.3.8
D.3.8.1
D.3.8.2
D.3.8.3
D.3.8.4
D.3.8.5
D.3.8.6
D.4
D.4.1

APPENDIX E

Fixed-Origin Scrolling
..... .
Graphics Text Variations
..... .
Color/Text/Graphics Interdependence
Loadable Alphabets
. . . . .
Slashed/Unslashed Zero Character
Display/Unit Cell Size Effect
Specifying Unit-Cell Size
Screen-Addressing Coordinates
Screen Time Delay Differences
Fixed Tick Length
Maximum Wait Time
Report Features
Report Error
Unimplemented Reports Response
Non-Supported VT125 Capabilities
No VT105 Emulation
No DECwriter Data Transfer
Additional Monitor Support
Scaling "Zoom" Not Implemented
No Custom Writing Controls (Input Map)
No Concurrent Display of Graphics and
ReGIS Text Mode
. . . ..... .
PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT240 REGIS
Image Distortion Factors . . . . . .

D-13

. D-13
D-14
D-14
D-14
. D-14
D-15
D-15
D-16
D-16
D-16
D-16
D-16
D-17
D-17
D-17
D-17
D-17
D-17
D-17
D-18
D-18
D-18

VT-52 COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

E.1
E.2
E.3
E.4
E.5
E.6
E.6.1

ANSI/VT52 COMPATIBILITY
CURSOR POSITIONING . . .
AUXILIARY KEYPAD CHARACTER SELECTION
CHARACTER SETS AND SELECTION
ERASING
PRINTING .
Reports

E-2
E-3
E-4
E-6
E-8
E-8
E-10

1-1
1-2

Application Environment for Native Mode
Application Environment for Terminal
Emulation Modes
7-Bit Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-Bit Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Groupings (U.S./Canada Keyboard)
Keys Used in VT100 and VT52 Modes
Character Set Selection
Character Cells in Text Mode . . .

1-7

INDEX

FIGURES

1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
3-1
4-1

Vll

1-8
1-14
1-18
2-3
2-3
3-40
4-5

4-2
4-3
4-4
D-1

Example of an 80-Column Font Character "A"
Example of 80-Column Font Character "A"
Divided into Sixels
..
Column Codes for Example 80-Column Font
Character "A"
. . .
.
.
Display/Unit-Cell Size Effect

4-6
4-7
4-8
D-15

TABLES
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
4-1
4-2
4-3

7-Bit ASCII Code Table
...
8-Bit Code Table
.
. .
.
DEC Multinational Character Set
DEC Special Graphics Character Set Mapped
into GL
. .
.
.
.
. .
DEC Technical Character Set Mapped into GL
Valid Compose Sequences
.
.
.
.
Valid and Invalid Compose Sequence Summary
Keys Used to Generate 7-bit Control
Characters
.
.
.
.
.
.
Codes Generated by Top Row Function Keys
Codes Generated by Editing Keys
.
Codes Generated by Cursor Control Keys
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys
DEC Multinational Character Set (CO and GL
Codes) .
.
. . .
. .
.
CO (ASCII) Control Characters Recognized by
Professional . . . .
.
Cl Control Characters Recognized by
Professional .
. .
. .
.
Summary of ANSI-Compatible Sequences
Comparison of Level 1 and Level 2
Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection
Sequences
.
.
.
ANSI-Standardized Modes
.
.
ANSI-Compatible DEC Private Modes
Linefeed/New Line Mode Characteristics
Codes Generated by Cursor Control Keys (ANSI
mode )
. .
. .
.
.
.
. .
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys
(ANSI Mode)
. .
.
Designating Character Sets
Invoking Character Sets Using Lock Shifts
States Selected by RIS Sequence in Native
Mode
.
. .
. .
.
.
. .
States Selected by RIS Sequence in Terminal
Emulation Mode
. .
.
States Selected by DECSTR Sequence
DECDLD Parameters Characters
.
Valid Pcms, Pw, Pt Combinations
Control Characters Used in Sixel Data Stream

viii

1-15
1-17
1-22
1-24
1-25
2-11
2-15
2-17
2-20
2-22
2-23
2-24
3-2
3-5
3-7
3-11
3-15
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-32
3-35
3-37
3-42
3-44

3-63
3-64

3-66
4-11
4-11
4-14

4-4
A-1
A-2
A-3

A-4
A-5
A-6

D-1
E-1

E-2
E.;;3

Color Specifier Parameters . . .
DEC Multinational Character Set
DEC Graphics Set Mapped into GL
DEC Technical Character Set Mapped into GL .
DEC Multinational Character Set and Numeric
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
DEC Special Graphics Set and Numeric Codes
DEC Technical Character Set and Numeric
Codes . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern Registration
........ .
Summary of VT52-Compatible Sequences . .
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys
Comparison of ASCII Graphics, DEC Special
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-15
A-2
A-4
A-5
A-6

A-13

A-14
D-10
E-1

E-5
E-7

PREFACE

Manual Objectives
This manual serves as a reference guide
Terminal Subsystem.
The manual covers
Professional application environments:

to the Professional
two possible types of

•

Application running on the Professional.

•

Application running on a remote host system while the
Professional is being operated in terminal emulation mode.
Terminal emulation is available through the
PRO/Communications application.

In both environments, the Professional processes and displays
data either in text mode (character-cell-oriented processing) or
graphics mode (pixel-oriented processing).
This manual covers
text mode almost exclusively.
Graphics mode is described in
other documents:
•

If you are using the Professional Tool Kit to develop an
application that will run on the Professional, refer to the
CORE Graphics Library Manual or the PRO/GIDIS Manual for
graphics programming information.

•

If you are developing a PRO/BASIC application on the
Professional, refer to the PRO/BASIC Language Manual for
graphics programming information.

•

If you are developing a graphics application that requires
direct access to the bitmap, refer to the Guide to Writing a
P/OS Device Driver Manual.

•

If you are developing a Professional application that will
run on a remote host system, refer to the PRO/ReGIS Manual
for graphics programming information.
ReGIS, the Remote
Graphics Instruction Set, is available through the
Pro/Communications application.

•

In any of the above cases, you should also refer to
Appendix C of this manual for information regarding mixing
text and graphics in your application.

This manual does not cover the Professional's terminal driver or
its effect on terminal I/O. Also, this manual does not describe
the environment for applications interfacing directly with the
xi

Professional's
asynchronous communications driver
(only the
terminal emulation environment is covered). Refer to the P/OS
System Reference Manual for information on the two drivers.

Intended Audience
You should read this manual if you are developing an application
for the Professional computer and need information about the
Professional's Terminal Subsystem. The Terminal Subsystem is the
subset of the Professional that provides functions typically
performed by a separate video display terminal, like the VT240.
Y6u should have some experience with the PRO/Tool Kit. Also, you
should have some experience programming on an
RSX-11
or
RSX-llM/M-PLUS system.

Structure of This Document
The manual has four chapters and five appendices.
The contents
are summarized below.
Because of many similarities, and to
facilitate comparison, the environments for applications running
on
the
Professional
and
on a remote host are treated
simultaneously.
Remember,
however,
that terminal
emulation
requires
the PRO/Communications application running on the
Professional.
Chapter 1, Introduction to the Terminal Subsystem, introduces the
environment both for applications running on the Professional and
for those running on a remote host while the Professional is
being operated as a terminal emulator. The chapter defines the
various text and graphics modes of operation.
It describes
character
encoding in the Professional,
including the DEC
Multinational Character Set and how the Professional accommodates
7-bit and 8-bit application environments.
Chapter 2, Codes Transmitted from Keyboard to
Application
Program,
describes the characters and codes generated by the
keyboard keys and transmitted to an application for all text
modes of operation.
Chapter 3, Response of Professional to Received Codes, describes
the response of the Professional to received codes in text mode,
and describes all control functions you can use in
your
application for all text modes of operation.
Chapter 4, Response of Professional to Control Strings, describes
the response of the Professional to control strings, as well as
device control strings that introduce ReGIS graphics, dynamically
redefinable character sets,
sixel graphics,
and user defined
keys.
In addition,
the chapter describes operating system
xii

command strings, privacy message strings, and application program
command strings.
Appendix A, Character Set Sununary, shows the code tables for all
Professional character sets,
including the octal, decimal, and
hexadecimal numerical code conversions.
Appendix B, Keyboards Illustrations,
includes
illustrations
all national keyboards available for the Professional.

Appendix C, Text and Graphics Mode Interaction
Native Mode,
offers guidelines for mixing text and graphics in Professional
applications.
Appendix D,
Differences in Emulated
Features,
lists
the
differences between VT100 and VT200 series video terminals and
the emulated features on the Professional.
Appendix E,
VT52 Compatible Sequences,
describes
the ANSIincompatible sequences
recognized by the Professional when in
VT52 emulation mode.

Associated Documents
The following documents are mentioned in this manual
of additional related information.

sources

Professional 300 Series User Documentation

Hard Disk System User's Guide
PRO/BASIC Language Manual
PRO/Communications User's Guide
VT100 and VT200 Documentation

VT102 Video Terminal User Guide
VT125 User Guide
VT220 User Guide
VT240 User Guide
If you are using the Professional Tool Kit to develop an
application
for
the Professional,
refer
to the Tool Kit
Documentation Directory for a description of other Tool Kit
documents.
Also refer to the Tool Kit Installation Guide and Release Notes.
That manual describes any software and/or documentation errors
that were discovered or changes that were made late
in the
development cycle.

xiii

Conventions Used in This Document
Meaning

Convention/Term

[optional]

In a command line, square brackets indicate
that the enclosed item is optional. In a file
specification, square brackets are part of
the required syntax.

UPPERCASE

Uppercase words and letters indicate that you
should type the word or letter exactly as
shown.

lowercase

Lowercase words and letters indicate that you
should substitute a word or value of your
own. Usually the lowercase word identifies
the type of substitution required.
A horizontal ellipsis indicates that you can
repeat the preceding item one or more times.
For example:
parameter [,parameter ... ]
A vertical ellipsis means that not all of the

statements are shown.
red

Interactive input appears in red.

Tool Kit

This general term refers to the software you
use to develop applications to run on a
Professional computer.

Host Tool Kit

The Host Tool Kit is Tool Kit software that
runs on a host computer, rather than on the
Professional itself.

PRO/Tool Kit

The PRO/Tool Kit is the Tool Kit software
that runs on the Professional computer.

xiv

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO THE TERMINAL SUBSYSTEM

The Professional's Terminal Subsystem displays text and graphics
on
the
monitor screen and returns keyboard input to an
application program. This manual describes how an application
interacts with the Terminal Subsystem to control the way data is
processed and displayed.
The Terminal Subsystem operates either in text mode or graphics
mode, at the request of the application.
Text mode is the
default.
Section 1.1 briefly compares the two modes.
Except for
that overview and the information in Appendices C and D, this
manual covers only the text-mode interactions between your
application and the Terminal Subsystem.
For example, it shows
how to control the way text looks on the screen or how to change
character sets with various text-mode commands.
You execute graphics mode interactions
through
high-level
language interfaces (CORE Graphics Library, PRO/BASIC, and ReGIS)
or through GIDIS, a low-level, virtual device interface.
Use of
the graphics interfaces is documented in the manuals indicated in
the Preface.
This chapter introduces the Terminal Subsystem
terminology used throughout the manual.

and

defines

the

•

Section 1.1 briefly describes the interaction of text and
graphics.

Section 1.2 defines the terminology used throughout the
manual when referring to various modes of operation.

Section 1.3 describes the character encoding scheme used on
the Professional when in text mode.

Section 1.4 introduces control characters, escape sequences,
and control sequences that provide your application control
over the Terminal Subsystem.

1-1

•

Section 1.5 discusses how to work with 7-bit and 8-bit
application environments.

1.1

COMPARISON OF TEXT MODE AND GRAPHICS MODE

The Professional's screen display consists of closely spaced
picture elements
(pixels) arranged as 960 columns and 240 rows.
In graphics mode, your application can turn pixels on and off
individually or in groups to create a variety of images, subject
only to the pixel resolution of the screen.
The mapping of
software addresses to pixels is determined by the software being
used.
In graphics mode, a pixel is the smallest addressable unit
of the screen.
In text mode, the Terminal Subsystem processes data on a coded
character basis,
and displays characters on the screen within
discrete rectangular cells.
The screen is divided into 80 X 24
or 132 X 24 such character cells, depending on whether the screen
is set for 80 or 132 columns.
Each cell consists of numerous
pixels.
Your application puts a character on the screen by
telling the Professional to address a cell and display a
character within that cell.
The character is encoded according
to the character set mapping the Professional is using at the
time,
for example ASCII coding.
In text mode, a character cell
is the smallest addressable unit of the screen.
Similar considerations apply to printing in text or graphics
mode.
In text mode,
a printer attached to the Professional
prints specified character cells.
In graphics mode, the printer
prints specified pixels.
In text mode, your application can interact directly with the
Terminal Subsystem to address individual character cells.
In
graphics mode, you use the CORE Graphics Library,
PRO/BASIC,
or
GIDIS to interact with the Terminal Subsystem when the PRO is in
native mode. When in terminal emulation mode,
only the ReGIS
instructions
are available.
These interfaces minimize the
tedious coding that would otherwise be necessary to control
individual pixels.
They also provide various degrees of hardware
independence, depending on the coding standards implemented.
Each mode of operation, text or graphics,
has advantages and
limitations.
In text mode, the screen can be written to faster
than in graphics mode because there are only 1920 (80 X 24)
or
3168
(132 X 24)
character cell addresses in text mode.
By
contrast, there are 230,400 (960 X 240) pixels in graphics mode
(the actual number of addresses to be controlled depends on the
mapping of software addresses to pixels).
The same speed

1-2

COMPARISON OF TEXT MODE AND GRAPHICS MODE
considerations apply to printing in text or graphics mode.
Your application can create a limited selection of images while
still operating in the faster,
text mode. The Professional
supports the DEC Special Graphics character set
(described in
Section 1.3).
In that character set, various small line elements
(straight line, corners) are encoded as individual characters.
You create images by connecting characters together.
Although slower than text mode, graphics mode on the Professional
lets you create a much greater variety of images on the screen or
printer, subject only to the pixel resolution.
In particular you
can ~create text in graphics mode.
In principle, you have an
unlimited range of character sizes, styles, and orientations when
working with text in graphics mode.
Graphics-mode text is
handled like any other type of graphics and offers the same
advantages and disadvantages when compared to text-mode text.
You can mix text and graphics in your application.
However,
to
do it properly you need a detailed understanding of graphics and
text modes. Appendix c offers some guidelines.
If your Professional does not have an extended bitmap option
(EBO), your application has one bitmap plane available. ·your
application can address a bitmap plane on a pixel basis.
The
application can either write to the plane in text mode or use it
in graphics mode at any point in the program.
Each pixel can
have only two possible states.
If your Professional has an EBO, your application has two
additional bitmap planes.
When in text mode, the application
always writes to a single plane. However, in graphics mode,
the
application can use the three planes in a variety of ways. The
exact possibilities depend on the graphics language you are
using.
When your application uses two planes in graphics mode,
a pixel
can have one of four (2**2) possible states. This gives up to
four shades of "gray" with the monochrome display monitor.
With
a color monitor,
two planes give you up to four colors from a
palette of 256 colors (on the PRO 350) or 4096 colors (on the PRO
380).
When your application uses all three planes in graphics mode,
a
pixel can have one of eight (2**3) possible states. This gives
up to eight shades of "gray" with the monochrome monitor. With a
color monitor, three planes give you have up to eight colors from
a palette of 256 colors (on the PRO 350) or 4096 colors
(on the
PRO 380).

1-3

COMPARISON OF TEXT MODE AND GRAPHICS MODE
An application using the CORE Graphics Library can use any one
plane, any pairs of planes, or all three planes in graphics mode.
When in graphics mode, a PRO/BASIC application always uses all
the available planes. You cannot use one plane in text mode and
use some other plane(s) in graphics mode.
An application using GIDIS can use 1, 2 or 3 planes.
The PRO/Communications application allows you to process ReGIS
graphics in both the VT100 and VT200 graphic modes. When in text
mode, your application writes only to plane 3. When in graphics
mode,
by default your application writes only to planes 1 and 2.
However, if you wish, the Professional also lets your application
use all three planes in graphics mode to obtain more degrees of
brightness or more colors. This may be useful in an interactive
program.

1.2

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS

This section describes the two application environments discussed
in this manual:
native mode and terminal emulation mode.
Consider these environments as modes of operation for the
Professional
(or, equally, for an application).
Because of many
similarities, this manual does not treat these modes individually
in separate chapters.
Rather,
it organizes and tabulates the
information so you can readily compare the functions of all modes
in each chapter.
The Professional operates in either native or terminal emulation
mode.
Native mode refers to the Professional as a stand-alone
system. Terminal emulation mode refers to the Professional
emulating a terminal under the control of PRO/Communications.
Because the Professional can emulate several kinds of terminals,
there are several terminal emulation modes: VT100, VT200 7-bit
controls, VT200 8-bit controls, and VT52 mode.
You select the
terminal emulation mode from the PRO/Communica~ions Terminal
Setup Menu.
In this manual, the terms VT100 mode,
VT200 mode,
and VT52 mode always refer to terminal emulation mode.
Before moving on to a detailed explaination of the two primary
operating modes,
native and terminal emulation, you need to
understand how
the
Professional
operates
in
terms
of
compatibility levels and ANSI-compatible versus ANSI-incompatible
modes.

1-4

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS
In native mode or terminal emulation mode, you can set the
compatibility level of your Professional to Level 1 or Level 2.
DIGITAL uses compatibility levels to standardize the level of
operations in terminals for interface compatibility.
Level 1,
which uses 7-bit data and 7-bit controls, is the standard for the
VT100 series of terminals; Level 2, which uses 8-bit data and
8-bit or 7-bit controls, is the standard for the VT200 series of
terminals.
Certain sequences described in the manual operate
only in Level 2. Chapters 3 and 4 identify these sequences.
(See Table 3-5 for a summary of the differences between Level 1
and Level 2.)
In native mode, the default is Level 2, but you can set your
Professional to Level 1.
In terminal emulation mode, Level 1
equates to VT100 mode and Level 2 equates to both VT200 modes.
In text mode, Levels 1 and 2 refer to ANSI-compatible modes.
An
ANSI-compatible mode executes functions recognized by ANSI.
For
example, the character codes, control codes, and most sequences
in the main body of this manual are either standardized by ANSI
or conform to ANSI standards. An ANSI-incompatible mode executes
private functions not recognized by ANSI.
Native (text) mode is always ANSI-compatible, whether operating
in Level 1 or Level 2.
Terminal emulation (text) mode is
ANSI-compatible in VT100 mode (Level 1) and VT200 modes (Level
2). It is ANSI-incompatible in VT52 mode, which is neither Level
1 nor Level 2. Material specific to the ANSI-incompatible VT52
terminal emulation mode is in Appendix E.
In both native and terminal emulation modes, you can control the
operating states of the Terminal Subsystem in two primary ways:
(1) by programming the states as described in Chapters 3 and 4,
and (2) by manually selecting the states through setup menus.
Although these menus are mentioned in the
discussion
of
programmable states, you should refer to the user manuals for
complete operating instructions. The User's Guide for Hard Disk
System describes the P/OS Setup menus, which affect applications
running in terminal emulation modes as well as native mode.
The
PRO/Communications User's Guide describes the various setup menus
available in terminal emulation mode. Chapter 3 contains a full
comparison
listing
of
the
setup
characteristics
and
(programmable) mode selection sequences.
A detailed explanation of the

two

follows.

1-5

modes

and

their

variations

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS

1.2.1

Native Mode

Native mode is the environment for an application running on
Professional. Applications running in native mode include:
•

Applications developed with the Tool Kit

•

PRO/BASIC applications (developed using PRO/BASIC)

•

Optional Digital-supplied applications, such as
PRO/Communications

the

Native (text) mode is ANSI compatible.
For
graphics-mode
interactions, an application uses the CORE Graphics Library,
PRO/BASIC graphics statements, or PRO/GIDIS instructions.
In native mode the Professional can operate in Level 1 and Level
2, at the user's option.
Level 2, which uses 8-bit data and
8-bit controls, is the default. You can select Level 1, which
uses 7-bit data and 7-bit controls,
for compatibility with
software restricted to a 7-bit environment. Level 1 in native
mode differs from Level 1 in VTlOO terminal emulation mode, in
that the 6 editing keys and top row function keys remain
available.
Figure 1-1 illustrates the native mode
environment.
The
application interacts with the Terminal Subsystem by way of the
terminal driver. The P/OS System Reference Manual describes the
terminal driver in detail.
It handles the queuing and dequeuing
of requests from the application to the Terminal Subsystem.
It
also screens certain control characters under various conditions
specified by the software.

1-6

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS

APPLICATION

TERMINAL
DRIVER

PRINTER
TERMINAL
SUBSYSTEM

DISPLAY

Figure 1-1:

KEYBOARD

Application Environment for Native Mode

1-7

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS

RUNS ON
HOST SYSTEM

HOST
APPLICATION

1--

I -

PROFESSIONAL

COMMUNICATIONS

~COMPUTER

PORT

COMMUNICATIONS
DRIVER

PR 0/COMMUN I CA Tl ONS
APPLICATION
EMULATOR
• VT52

• VT100
• VT200, 7-bit clrl
• VT200, 8-bit ctrl

TERMINAL
DRIVER

PRINTER

TERMINAL
SUBSYSTEM

LISPLAY

Figure 1-2:

KEYBOARD

Application Environment for Terminal Emulation Modes

1-8

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS
1.2.2

Terminal Emulation Modes

Figure 1-2 shows the application environment for
terminal
emulation.
The PRO/Communications application runs on the
Professional in native mode. The host application communicates
with
the Terminal Subsystem through the PRO/Communications
terminal emulator.
A PRO/Communications menu lets the Professional computer operator
choose one of four possible terminal emulation modes:
•

VT100 mode (Level 1)

•

VT200 mode, 7-bit controls (Level 2)

•

VT200 mode, 8-bit controls (Level 2)

•

VT52 mode

Selecting one of these modes causes the Professional to behave
like a terminal of that type. The Professional communicates with
a host application or host system as if it were a terminal of
that type.
By using the above menu selections, the operator ensures that the
Professional will not only behave like one of the four terminals,
but will also identify itself as one to any host application or
syst~m
requesting a device identifier (the identifying responses
are detailed in Chapter 3).
Complete operating instructions on the emulator, including setup
features
and
default
conditions
are
documented in the
PRO/Communications User's Guide.
An overview of additional
emulation mode follows.

key

information

specific

each

VT100 Mode - Level 1 - VT100 mode emulation combines the
text processing capability of a VT102 terminal and ReGIS graphics
processing capability.
1.2.2.1

In text mode, VT100 mode is ANSI-compatible.
operations as follows:
•

You can use only VT100 keys.

1-9

This mode restricts

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS
•

You can process only 7-bit data.

•

You can use only 7-bit controls.

•

You can load only ASCII and the DEC Special Graphics
character sets.

This mode provides strict backward compatibility
software written for the VT100 terminal family.

with

existing

There are some functional differences between how a VTlOO
terminal and VTlOO mode on the Professional process text. We
point them out throughout this manual and list them in Appendix
D.
To process ReGIS graphics, your Professional must have the
extended bitmap option (EBO). Without an EBO, you can process
only text in VT100 mode. Assuming you have an EBO, VT100 mode
gives you bitmap addressing capability and access to the ReGIS
interpreter.
ReGIS is the Digital Remote Graphics Instruction Set.
You use
ReGIS in a program to create and store images as ASCII text,
called ReGIS strings. The program, running on a host system, can
then send them to a remote graphics terminal (or a Professional
in VTlOO mode emulation) for execution. Prior to processing a
ReGIS string,
the terminal operates in text mode. Receipt of a
command introducing one or more ReGIS strings automatically
switches the terminal to graphics mode so it can process and
display ReGIS graphics. After the ReGIS code is executed, a
string terminator switches the terminal back to text mode.
Chapter 3 documents the commands to enter and exit ReGIS graphics
mode and the default states.
See the PRO/ReGIS Manual for
complete ReGIS programming information.
There are some significant functional differences between ReGIS
graphics on the Professional and ReGIS on a VT125 terminal. You
should refer to Appendix D for a summary of these differences and
their impact on software compatibility.

1.2.2.2 VT200 Mode, 7-Bit Controls - Level 2 - VT200 Mode, 7-bit
controls (provided as the preset default in PRO/Communications)
executes standard ANSI functions when processing text.
It
provides
all
VT200
functions
in an 8-bit communication
environment with 7-bit controls (see section 1.5).
When using
this mode you can:

1-10

ENVIRONMENTS FOR PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS

Use all keys on the Professional keyboard.

•

Use 8-bit data.

•

Use the DEC Multinational Character Set as well as down-line
loadable character sets.

When processing graphics, this emulation mode supports
the same way as VT100 mode.

ReGIS

Refer to Appendix D for differences between graphics on a
terminal and on the Professional in VT200 mode emulation.

VT240

1.2.2.3 VT200 Mode, 8-Bit Controls - Level 2 - This emulation
mode executes all standard ANSI functions and provides the full
range of VT200 capabilities in an 8-bit communication environment
with 8-bit controls.
This mode supports ReGIS graphics exactly
as the 7-bit VT200 mode.

1.2.2.4 VT52 Mode - VT52 mode is an ANSI-incompatible text mode
that executes DIGITAL-private functions.
It is offered on the
Professional only for compatibility with earlier software.
VT52 mode is implemented on the Professional as a subset of VT100
mode:
when operating the Professional in VT52 mode, you can
communicate with the host system and the application as if you
were at a VT100 terminal emulating a VT52 terminal.
The same
restrictions listed for VT100 mode apply to VT52 mode.
You can select VT52 mode through program control as well as
through a PRO/Communications menu selection.
Chapter 3 describes
how to invoke VT52 mode in a program. Appendix E explains how to
use the VT52-compatible commands.

1.3

CHARACTER ENCODING

This section describes the character encoding
Professional when operating in text mode.

1.3.1

used

the

Coding Standards

The Professional uses an 8-bit character encoding scheme and
7-bit code extension techniques that are compatible with the
1-11

CHARACTER ENCODING
following ANSI and ISO standards.
ANSI
(American National
Standards Institute) and ISO (International Organization for
Standardization) specify the current standards for character
encoding used in the communications industry.
ANSI X3.4-1977
American Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
ISO 646-1977
7-Bit Coded Character Set for Information Processing Interchange
ANSI X3.41-1974
Code Extension Techniques for Use with the 7-Bit Coded Character
Set of American National Code for Information Interchange
ISO Draft International Standard 2022.2
7-Bit and 8-Bit Coded Character Sets - Code Extension Techniques
ANSI X3.32-1973
Graphic Representation of the Control Characters of American
National Code for Information Interchange
ANSI X3.64-1979
Additional Controls for Use with American National Standard for
Information Interchange
ISO Draft International Standard 6429.2
Additional Control Functions for Character Imaging Devices
ISO Draft International Standard 6937
Coded Character Sets for Text Communication
The default character set on the Professional is the 8-bit DEC
Multinational
Character
Set.
It is compatible with the
traditional 7-bit ASCII character encoding scheme:
the ASCII
character set is a subset of DEC Multinational.
The Professional is designed to accommodate 7-bit software, when
necessary,
in all text modes.
By default, the Professional will
transmit 7-bit code extensions to an application instead of 8-bit
control characters.
But you can make the Professional transmit
8-bit control characters if your application environment can take
advantage of the faster processing possible with 8-bit codes.
Sections 1.4 and 1.5 explain control functions and how to work
with 7- and 8-bit codes.

1-12

CHnRACTER ENCODING

1.3.2

Code Table

A code table is a convenient way to represent 7- and 8-bit
characters, because groupings of characters and their relative
codes can be seen readily.

NOTE
The familiar ASCII 7-bit character set is used
below to introduce some terminology and coding
conventions. The 8-bit coding scheme used on the
Professional
is
described
after
this
introduction.

1-13

CHARACTER ENCODING

1.3.2.1

7-Bit Code Table -

Table 1-1 is the 7-bit ASCII code table.
There are 128
(2**7)
positions,
corresponding to 128 character codes, arranged in a
matrix of 8 columns and 16 rows.
Each row represents a possible value of the 4 least significant
bits of a 7-bit code.
Each column represents a possible value of
the 3 most significant bits.

BIT
7

BIT
6

BIT
5

BIT
4

BIT
3

BIT
2

I I J~ I
I..

3 MOST
SIGNIFICANT BITS

'"I:

(DECIMAL VALUE IS
COLUMN IN
CODE TABLE)

Figure 1-3:

BIT
1

I I

LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT;I

(DECIMAL VALUE
IS ROW IN
CODE TABLE)

7-Bit Code

Table 1-1 shows the octal, decimal, and hexadecimal code for each
ASCII character.
You can also represent any character by its
position in the table.
For example, the character "H" (column 4,
row 8) can be represented as 4/8. The column/row representation
is like hexadecimal notation.
For example,
the character "n"
(6/14) is 6E in hex code.

NOTE
The column/row notation is used to represent
characters and codes throughout this manual.
Appendix A lists all equivalent codes in various
notations.

1-14

CHARACTER ENCODING
Table 1-1
7-Bit ASCII Code Table

. 1

COLUMN

BITS

,.......,,,,
ROW

i'4UL

STX
I

ETX

20
16

40
32
20

DLE

1
1
1

21
17
11

22
18
12

DC2

2
2
3

DC3

3
3

(XOFF)

4
5

EOT
ENQ

DC4

IACK

SYN

91
110 I

111

BEL
BS

ETB

7
7
10
8

CAN

9
9

12
10
A
13
11

27
23
17
30
24
18
31
25
19

,SUB

1 1

1S
13
D

I so

16
14
E

17
15
F

43
3S

32
26
1A

27
1B
34
28
1C
3S
29
10

"''

&
f

(

*
+

38
26

~-----!.--_,,

63
51

52
34
S3
66
54

27
50
40
28

8
9

2A
S3
43
28

551
4S
20

56
46
2E

37
31

57
47

;

<
=

68
44
69
45
106

70
46
107

s
T

v
w

110
72
48

111
73
49

112
74
4A

71
S7

72
S8
3A

73
S9
38

113

74
60
3C
75
61

75
4B
114
76
4C

116

[

J
A

4E
117

79
4F

122
82

140
96
60
141
97

160
112
70

161
113
71

162

123
83

142

143
99

114
72
163

115

124

144

164

84
54

125
85

100
64
145
101

126

146
102

86
56

127
87
S7

58
131
89
59

h
i

92
SC
135
93

151
10S

1S2
106
6A
1 S3

107
68

v
w

l
m

108
6C
1 SS
109

60
156

118
76
167
119

77
170

120
78
171

121
79
172

{

122
7A
173
123
78
174

154

136
94
SE
137
9S
5F

133
91
S8

150
104

117
166

132
90
SA

103
67

116
74
16S

I.I

147

130

134

115

70
S6

77
63

1-15

81
S1

1
0

121

62
3E

HEX

67
43

120
80

103

105

S2
42

66
42

104

S4
44

41
29

DECIMAL

......

37
2S

36
30

OCTAL

CHARACTER

102 '

ESC

14
12

B
1

34
22

64
40
101
6S
41

61
49

100

2S
21

41
33
21

48
30

1
1

5
5

!NAK

1
0

13
20
14

23
19

1
1

0
0

SOM

0
1

b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

124
7C

}

17S
125
70

......,

176
126

110
6E

7E
177

157
111
6F

DEL

127
7F

CHARACTER ENCODING
The Professional processes received characters based on two
character types defined by ANSI:
graphic characters and control
characters.
Graphic characters are the characters you write, print, or
display on a video screen. The ASCII graphic characters are in
positions 2/1 through 7/14 of Table 1-1.
They include all
American and English alphanumeric characters, plus punctuation
marks and various text symbols. Examples are: C, n, ", !, +,
$
(the English pound sign is not an ASCII graphic character).
Control characters are nondisplay, single-byte codes that perform
traditional functions in data communications and text processing.
The ASCII control characters are in positions 0/0 through 1/15
(columns 0 and 1) of Table 1-1. The SP character ("space'', 2/0)
can be either a graphic character or a control character
depending on the context.
DEL (7/15)
is always a control
character.
The codes and functions of control characters
have
been
standardized by ANSI.
Examples of ASCII control characters, with
their ANSI-standard mnemonics, are:
CR (carriage return),
FF
(form feed),
CAN (cancel). Appendix A summarizes all standard
ANSI definitions for control characters.

1.3.2.2 8-Bit Code Table - You can
generalize
the
above
conventions
the 8-bit character encoding used on the
to
Professional. Table 1-2 shows the 8-bit code table.
It has
twice as many columns as the 7-bit table, because it contains 256
(2**8) versus 128 (2**7) code values.

1-16

CHARACTER ENCODING
Table 1-2
8-Bit Code Table

rs::

NUL

OLE

SOH

DC1

PU1

STX

DC2

PU2

ETX

DC3

STS

EOT

DC4

IND

CCH

ENO

NAK

NEL

ACK

SYN

SSA

SPA

BEL

ETB

ESA

EPA

CAN

HTS

HTJ

SUB

VTS

ESC

PLO

CSI

PLU

osc

SS2

SS3

APC

DEL

DCS

111

)~·~c_o_c_o_o_Es~•~)4•~---GLCODES•~---_,.•~)·•c-1-c_o_o_E_s_•~)•,,___----GRcooEs•~~~~->
~-----7-BIT

CODE TABLE~-----

1-17

CHARACTER ENCODING
As with the 7-bit table, each row represents a possible value of
the 4 least significant bits of an 8-bit code. Each column
represents a possible value of the 4 most significant bits.

BIT
8

BIT
7

BIT
6

BIT
5

BIT
4

BIT
3

BIT
2

BIT
1

I I
I~ MOST SIGNIFICANT BITS· I: LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT;I
(DECIMAL VALUE IS COLUMN
IN CODE TABLE)

Figure 1-4:

(DECIMAL VALUE IS ROW
IN CODE TABLE)

8-Bit Code

All codes on the left half of the 8-bit table (columns 0 through
7) are 7-bit compatible:
their 8th bit is not set and can be
ignored or assumed to be 0. You can use these codes in either a
7-bit or an 8-bit environment. All codes on the right half of
the table (columns 8 through 15) have their 8th bit set. You can
use these codes only in an 8-bit compatible environment.
The 8-bit code table has two sets of control characters
(CO,
"control zero",
and Cl, "control one") and two sets of graphic
characters (GL, "graphic left" and GR, "graphic right").
On the Professional, the basic functions of the CO and Cl codes
are as defined by ANSI.
CO codes represent the ASCII control
characters described earlier. The CO codes are 7-bit compatible.
The Cl codes represent 8-bit control characters that let you
perform additional functions beyond those possible with the CO
codes.
Cl codes can be used only in an 8-bit environment.
Some
Cl code positions have been left blank:
their functions have not
yet been standardized. The standard ANSI definitions for the CO
and Cl characters are summarized in Appendix A.

NOTE
Not all CO and Cl codes are recognized by the
Professional.
Chapter 3 identifies the ones that
are.
The others are simply ignored by the
Professional (no action taken).
The GL and GR sets of codes are reserved for graphic
1-18

characters.

CHARACTER ENCODING
There are 94 GL codes in positions 2/1 through 7/14 and 94 GR
codes in positions 10/1 through 15/14.
By ANSI standards,
positions 10/0 and 15/15 are reserved. You can use GL codes in
7-bit or 8-bit environments. You can use GR codes only in an
8-bit environment.

1.3.3

The Professional Character Sets

You cannot change the functions of the CO or Cl codes on the
Professional.
However, you can map different sets of graphic
characters onto the GL and/or GR codes. The sets are stored "on
call" within the Professional as a sort of graphic repertoire.
But, they are not available for use until mapped onto the GL or
GR codes.
The commands for mapping graphic character sets onto
GL or GR are described in Chapter 3.
The Professional's
94-character sets.
three sections:

graphic
repertoire
consists
of
four
Their relationship is described in the next

•

ASCII Graphics Set

•

DEC Supplemental Graphics Set

•

DEC Special Graphics Set, also known as the VT100 Line
Drawing Set

•

DEC Technical Character Set, provided as a down-line loadable
character set

NOTE
Terminal emulation modes (Levels 1 and 2) also
provide
support
for
a
range of National
Replacement Character Sets.
Refer
to
the
PRO/Communications User's Guide for details.

1.3.3.1 DEC Multinational Character Set - The DEC Multinational
Character Set is composed of the ASCII Character Set (a 7-bit
compatible set) mapped into GL and the DEC Supplemental Character
Set (an 8-bit compatible set) mapped into GR. This is the
default mapping when you power-up the Professional in native mode
or issue a RIS. When you enter or reset the PRO/Communications
terminal emulator, the ASCII Character Set is mapped into GL.
Either
the
DEC Supplemental Character Set or a National

1-19

CHARACTER ENCODING
Replacement Character Set (depending on the default
is mapped into GR.

you

select)

The DEC Supplemental Character Set has alphabetic characters with
diacritical marks that appear in the major Western European
alphabets.
It also has other symbols not included in the ASCII
Graphics Set.
Table 1-3 shows the DEC Multinational Character Set.
The Professional supports over a dozen
national
(Western
European)
keyboards.
Use of all Professional keyboards assumes
the default DEC Multinational Character Set
mapping.
In
addition, the code descriptions in the rest of this manual assume
that default mapping.
Various characters from the DEC Supplemental Graphics Set appear
as standard (printing character) keys on different keyboards.
By
supplementing the standard keys with
"compose
sequences",
described in Chapter 2, you can create any DEC Multinational
graphic character from any Professional keyboard.

1.3.3.2 DEC Special Character Set - In addition to ASCII and DEC
Supplemental, the Professional's graphic repertoire has the DEC
Special Graphics Set,
also known as the VT100 Line Drawing
Character Set.
It is shown in Table 1-4. This set has about two
thirds of the ASCII graphic characters.
In addition,
it has
special symbols and short line segments. The line segments let
you create a limited range of pictures while still using text
mode.
Note that the following characters appear in both the DEC
Supplemental and DEC Special Graphics sets but under different
codes.
Supplemental
Graphics

Special
Graphics

10/3
11/0
11/1

7/13
6/6
6/7

Pound sign ( £)
Degree sign ( 0 )
Plus/minus sign (1/-)

The DEC Supplemental Graphics middle dot (11/7)
is a different
character from the DEC Special Graphics raised dot (7/14). The
former is typically used to separate numeric digits. The latter
is used with line drawing segments in the DEC Special Graphics
set.
Commands described in Chapter 3

let

1-20

you

map

the

DEC

Special

CHARACTER ENCODING
Graphics Set into either GL or GR, replacing either the ASCII
Graphics Set or the DEC Supplemental Graphics
Set.
The
recommended mapping is to switch between ASCII and DEC Special
Graphics in GL, since the latter has most of the ASCII graphic
characters. Also, this mapping is compatible with Level 1 mode.

1.3.3.3 DEC Technical
Character
Set - The
Character Set contains four types of characters:

DEC

Technical

•

Components characters {positions 2/1 through 3/7). You can
combine these characters in adjacent vertical and/or
horizontal character cells to form large technical
characters.

•

Mathematical symbols

•

Logic symbols

•

Greek characters

Table 1-5 shows the Technical Character Set.
The DEC Technical Character Set is provided as a soft character
set (a Dynamically Redefinable Character Set, described in
Chapter 4), as opposed to the hard sets that are always loaded in
memory.
The character set has both an 80 and 132 column format.
In native mode, you can down-line load this set by copying the
file LB:[ZZFONT]TCS.SET to your Pro {TI:). When you copy the
file, it automatically performs the following functions:
•

Loads the 80 column font into font buffer 3 and the 132
column font into font buffer 4. (See DECDLD sequence in
Chapter 4.)

•

Designates the set to G3.

(See SCS sequence in Chapter 3.)

In terminal emulation mode, you must copy the file to the host
system, edit the file to load the desired format (80 or 132) into
font buffer 1 (the only font buffer available in emulation mode),
and use the DCL TYPE command to display the file.
To invoke the Technical Character Set, use a Locking Shift or
Single Shift (described in Chapter 3). You can also create your
own soft character sets that you can down-line load with a DECDLD
sequence. Chapter 4 explains how to do this.
Graphics mode also supports user-loadable character sets.
to the PRO/GIDIS Manual for details.

1-21

Refer

CHARACTER ENCODING
Table 1-3
DEC Multinational Character Set (CO and GL Codes)

BITS

b8
b7
~

ROW

b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

NUL

0
0
0
1
1
1

SOH

0 0

STX

OLE
DC1
IXON)

2
2

ETX

3
3
3
4
4
4

EOT

ENO

22
18
12

DC3

23
19
13

ACK

1· 1

BEL

7
7
7

10
8
8

120
80
50

140
96
60

160
112
70

41
33
21

61
49
31

101
65
41

121
81
51

141
97
61

161
113
71

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

162
114
72

63
51
33

DC4

NAK

25
21
15

45
37
25

SYN

26
22
16

46
38
26

ETB

27
23
17

47
39
27

CAN

30
24
18

11
9
9

31
25
19

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
1A

13
11
B

ESC

33
27
18

34
28
1C

35
29
1D

100
64
40

64
52
34

14
12

44
36
24

1 1

15
13
D

16
14
E

36
30
1E

17
15
F

37
31
1F

103
67
43

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

142

123
83

98
62

143
99
63

163
115
73

144
100
64

164
116
74

104
68
44

124
84
54

65
53
35

105
69
45

125
85
55

145
101
65

165
117
75

66
54
36

126
86
56

146
102
66

166
118
76

67
55
37

147
103
67

(

50
40
28

70
56
38

150
104
68

)

51
41
29

151
105
69

52
42
2A

152
106
6A

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

174
124
7C

}

175
125
70

*
+

106
70
46
107
71
47

127
87
57

110
72
48

130
88
58

71
57
39

111
73
49

131
89
59

72
58
3A

112
74
4A

132
90
5A

53
43
28

;

73
59
38

[

133
91
58

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

134
92
5C

55
45
20

75
61
30

115
77
40

]

135
93
50

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

57
47
2F

117
79
4F

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

113

KEY
ESC

122
82
52

63
3F

75
4B

I_
GLCODES
i----CO C O D E S - - - - - - - - - - - - ( A S C l l GRAPHICS)

CHARACTER

60
48
30

24
20
14

1
0

40
32
20

43
35
23

5
6
6
6

10
21
17
11

DC2
(XOFF)

5
5

20
16

1
0

0
1

1
1

0
1

0
0

COLUMN

1-22

154
108
6C
155
109
60

167
119
77

DEL

170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

CHARACTER ENCODING

Table 1-3
DEC Multinational Character Set (C1 and GR Codes)

8
1

0
0

200
128
80

ocs

220
144
90

201
129
81

PU1

221
145
91

202
130
82

PU2

203
131
83

STS

IND

204
132
S4

CCH 148
94

NEL

205
133
85

225
149
95

SSA 134S6 SPA

226
150
96

ESA

207
135
S7

227
151
97

HTS

210
136
BB

230
152
9B

HTJ

211
137
S9

231
153
99

VTS

212
138
SA

232
154
9A

PLO

213
139
SB

CSI

233
155
9B

PLU

214
140
SC

215
141
SD

SS2
SS3

1
1

BITS

b6
b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

1----i

260
176
BO

'
A

300
192

320
208
DO

340
224
ED

360
240
FD

261
177
B1

361
241
F1

262
178
B2

362
242
F2

241
161
A1

222
146
92

242
162
A2

223
147
93

243
163
A3

224

1
1

COLUMN

0
240
160
AO

1
1

0
1

0
0

1
0

244
164
A4

ROW

301
193
C1

321
209
01

302
194
C2

322
210
02

342
226
E2

303
195
C3

343
227
E3

363
243
F3

264
180
B4

••
A

304
196
C4

324
212
04

344
228
E4

A
0

364
244
F4

325
213
05

345
229
E5

365
245
F5

366
246
F6

263
179
B3

,
A

323
211
03

-..

341
225
E1

245
165
A5

265
181
B5

305
197
C5

246
166
A6

266
182
B6

306
198
C6

••
0

326
214
06

346
230
E6

247
167
A7

267
183
B7

307
199
C7

327
215
07

347
231
E7

367
247
F7

:a:

250
168
AB

270
1B4
BB

310
200
CB

330
216
DB

350
232
EB

370
24B
FB

251
169
A9

271
185
B9

311
201
C9

'
u

331
217
09

351
233
E9

'
u

371
249
F9

252
170
AA

332
218
DA

352
234
EA

372
250
FA

253
171
AB

353
235
EB

373
251
FB

234
156
9C

374
252
FC

osc

375
253
FD

216
142
SE

376
254
FE

217
143
SF

377
255
FF

1 1

206

EPA

'
,

272
186
BA

312
202
CA

273
1B7
BB

••
E

313
203
CB

333
219
DB

254
172
AC

274
1B8
BC

314
204

••
u

334
220
DC

235
157
90

255
173
AD

1/2

275
189
BO

••
y

335
221
DD

..'36
15B
9E

256
174
AE

APC

237
159
9F

257
175
AF

276
190
BE

277
191
BF

••I

315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

336
222
DE

337
223
OF

'~--GR CODES
~C1 CODES----1----------(DEC SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS)

1-23

..e
,
A

..
I

354
236
EC
355
237
ED

..
..

356
23B
EE
357
239
EF

CHARACTER ENCODING
Table 1-4
DEC Special Graphics Set Mapped into GL

87
~

BITS

ROW

85
84 83 82 Bl

0
0

NUL
SOH

0
0
0

OLE

1
-1

DC1
IXONI

1
2

STX

ETX

3
3
3
4
4
4

EOT

ENO

DC2

2
2

5
5
5

20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12

SYN

26
22
16

46
38
26

ETB

27
23
17

47
39
27

BEL

7
7
7

CAN

'.30
24
18

10
8
8

11
9
9

31
25
19

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
lA

13
11
8

ESC

27
18

34
28
lC

35
29
1D

15
13
D

36
30
1E

37
31
1F

17
15
F

103
67
43

104
68
44

65
53
35

66
54
36

67
55
37

(

50
40
28

70
56
38

)

51
41
29

52
42
2A

64
52
34

45
37
25

63
51
33

25
21
15

16
14
E

102
66
42

NAK

ACK

62
50
32

100
64
40

DC4

43
35

101
65
41

44
36
24

42
34
22

60
48
30
61
49
31

24
20
14

14
12

41
33
21

23
19
13

40
32
20

1
0

140
96
60

122
82
52
83
53

111
73
49

131
89
59

72
58
3A

112
74
4A

53
43
28

;

73
59
38

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

75
61
3D

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

57
47
2F

117
79 I BLANK)
4F

CHARACTER

ESC

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

1-24

165
117
75

146
102
66

166
118
76

147
103
67

150
104
68

170
120
78

151
105
69

171
121
79

152
106
6A

113
75
48
114
76
4C

90
5A

143
99
63
144
100
64
145

167
119
77

172
122
7A

[

133
91
58

153
107
68

173
123
78

134
92
5C

154
108
6C

174
124
7C

]

135
93
5D

155
109
6D

175
125
7D

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

115
77

132

137
95
5F

GLCODES
r-co CODES---r---------(DEC SPECIAL
GRAPHICS)

KEY

101
65

126
86
56

164
116
74

71
57
39

162

106
70
46

98
62

SCAN 9

SCAN 5

142

161
113
71

163
115
73

125
85
55

87
57

160
112
70

114
72

127

141
97
6·1

SCAN 3

SCAN 7

105
69
45

63
3F

130
88
58

123

110
72
48

55
45

•

120
80
50

1
0

124
84
54

107
71

121
81
51

1
0

DC3
IXOFFI

6
6
6

SP
!

1
1

0
1

COLUMN

SCAN 1

157
111
6F

176
126
7E

DEL

177
127
7F

CHARACTER ENCODING

Table 1-5:

DEC Technical Character Set Mapped into GL

BITS

b8
b7
~

COLUMN

ROW

b4 b3 b2

0 0

6
7

61
49
31

62
50
32

63
51
33

10
21
17
11

41
33
21

SOH

22
18
12

42
34
22

STX
ETX

23
19
13

EOT

2
2
3

DC1
IXONI

DC2
DC3

3
3

IXOFF)

DC4

ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS

20
14

5
5

NAK

5
0

60
48
30

1
1
1

OLE

20
16

NOL - 0

40
32
20

0
0

SYN

6
6

25
21
15
26
22
16

7
7
7
10
8
8

ETB

27
23
17

CAN

30
24
18

1 0

12
10
A

SUB

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

34
28
1C

13
14
15

1 1

16
14
E

17
15
F

35
29

36
30
1E

37
31
1F

23
44
36
24

37
25

38
26

64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36

47
39
27

l
l

50
40
28

51
41
29

71
57
39

32
26
1A

15
13
D

31
25
19

11
9
9

14
12

43
35

67
55
37
70

:::::

52
42
2A

58
3A

(

53
43
28

73
59
38

54
44
2C

.!::

55
45
20

'
)

75
61
30
76

60
3C

57
47
2F

62
3E
77
63
3F

•

100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42

67
43

ESC

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

1-25

122
82

83
53

104

124
84
54

68
44
105
69
45

125

106

126
86

70
46
107
71

85
55

{

87
57

111
73
49

131
89
59

112
74
4A

72
48

113

132
90
SA

:::i

91
58

114
76
4C

134

115
77
40

135
93
50

/\.

136
94
5E

137
95
5F

116

79
4F

140

141
97
61

92
5C

160
112
70

i/J

161
113
71

142

162

x
~
€

143
99

63
144
100
64

'Y
11

'
e
'A

146
102

166
118
76

66
103
67

f
w

150
104
68

151
105
69

152
106
6A
107
68
154
108
6C

156
110
6E

116
74
165
117

155
109
60

,,,

163
115
73

145
101
65

153

114
72

164

147

133

75
48

78
4E

127

130
88
58

110

GLCODES

CHARACTER

121
81
51

123

(TECHNICAL)

KEY

120
80
50

1
0

103

117

1
1

1
0

0
1

1
1

0
1

0
0

157
111
6F

167
119

77
170
120
78
171
121
79

173
123
78

174
124
7C

...

172
122
7A

175
125
70
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

1.4

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

You use control functions in your application to specify how the
Professional should handle data.
There are many uses for control
functions, and more are being created.
Here are some of the
things you can do with control functions:
•

Change the monitor display from 80-column to 132-column
format.

•

Move the cursor on the display.

•

Delete a line of text from the display.

•

Change graphic character sets.

•

Make the printer print in text mode (or graphics mode),

•

Make the auxiliary keypad keys available for specific
functions that you define within your application.

•

Make the Professional operate in 7-bit mode or 8-bit mode, to
accommodate different application environments.

•

Ask the Professional to identify itself to an application
running on a host system, including whether an option like
the color monitor or the extended bitmap option is being
used.

•

Switch the Professional from one emulation mode to another

You use all control functions in text mode and
single-byte or multibyte codes.

1.4.1

express

them

Control Characters

The single-byte codes are the CO and
introduced earlier in Section 1. 3. 2.
perform a limited number of functions
characters.

Cl control characters
Your application can
using the CO and Cl

Multibyte control codes allow many more functions because of the
variety of code combinations possible.
These codes are called
escape sequences and control sequences.
Some sequences are ANSI
standardized and used throughout the industry.
Others are
"private" sequences created by manufacturers like DIGITAL for
specific families of products.
Private sequences, like the ANSI
standardized sequences,
obey ANSI standards
governing
the
composition of character codes used.

1-26

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

1.4.2

Escape Sequences

An escape sequence is a sequence of one or more ASCII graphic
characters preceded by the CO character ESC (1/11).
For example,
1/11 2/3 3/7
ESC
#
7
is an escape sequence that causes a printer attached to the
Professional to print the contents of the current screen display.
Because escape sequences use only 7-bit characters, you
them in 7-bit or 8-bit environments.

can

use

NOTE
When using escape or control sequences,
remember
that it is the code that defines a sequence, not
the graphic representation of the characters.
The characters are shown for readability only and
presume the DEC Multinational Character
Set
mapping
(ASCII Graphics Set in GL and DEC
Supplemental Graphics Set in GR).
There is an important special use of escape sequences on the
Professional.
ANSI permits code extension techniques to extend
the functionality of 7-bit control functions.
In particular, you
can use 2-byte escape sequences as 7-bit code extensions to
express each of the Cl control codes.
This is valuable when your
application must be compatible with a 7-bit environment.
For
example, the Cl characters CSI, SS3, and IND can be expressed as
follows:
Cl Character

7-bit Code Extension
(Escape Sequence)

9/11
CSI

1/11 5/11
ESC
[

8/15
SS3

1/11 4/15
ESC
0

8/4
IND

1/11 4/4
ESC
D

The above code extension technique can be generalized as follows:
You can express any Cl character as a two-character escape
sequence whose second character has a code that
is
40,
hexadecimal
(64, decimal), less than that of the Cl character.
Conversely, you can make any supported escape sequence whose
second character is in the range 4/0 through 5/15 one byte

1-27

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

shorter by removing the ESC and adding 40,
code of the second character.

1.4.3

hexadecimal,

the

Control Sequences

A control sequence is a sequence of one or more ASCII
graphic
characters preceded by the control sequence introducer, the Cl
character CSI (9/11).
But CSI can be expressed as the 7-bit code
extension ESC
(1/11 5/11).
So you can express all control
sequences as escape sequences whose second character code is
[
(5/11).
For example, the following two sequences
9/11 3/15 3/3 6/8
CSI
?
3
h

1/11 5/11 3/15 3/3 6/8
ESC
[
?
3
h

are equivalent sequences that perform the same function.
They
cause the display to use 132 columns per line rather than 80.
Whenever possible, you should use CSI
instead of ESC
to
introduce a control sequence.
CSI uses one less byte than ESC [,
so you gain processing speed.
But a sequence starting with CSI
can be used only in an 8-bit environment, because CSI is a Cl
character.
The next section explains how to handle 7- and 8-bit
environments.

1.5

application

WORKING WITH 7- AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS

To take advantage of the Professional's 8-bit character set, your
application
and
communications
environment must be 8-bit
compatible.
The application can then transmit and receive the
8-bit GR graphic codes and Cl control codes as well as the 7-bit
GL and CO codes.
The advantages of working in an 8-bit
environment include the following:
•

An expanded graphic character set is readily available to the
user.

•

Processing efficiency is gained by using 8-bit control
characters in the application instead of the functionally
equivalent two-byte 7-bit code extensions.

1-28

WORKING WITH 7- AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS

The 8-bit environment is the norm
native mode.

for

applications

running

In the terminal emulation modes,
the
application
and/or
communications
environment
may
be only 7-bit compatible.
Therefore, a PRO/Communications menu lets the operator enable the
transmission of either only the 7-bit codes or both the 7- and
8-bit codes.
In VT100 and VT52 modes only 7-bit codes are
available. VT200 mode has a 7- and an 8-bit option available.
Detailed conventions for working with 7- and 8-bit environments
follow.
The behavior of the Terminal Subsystem is emphasized.
This is the behavior apparent to native mode applications and to
applications running in terminal emulation modes when 8-bit
characters are enabled by the operator.
When the operator chooses to enable only 7-bit codes,
to
environment,
the
accommodate
a
7-bit
communications
PRO/Communications application alters the Terminal Subsystem's
behavior. All such differences in behavior are noted.

1.5.1

Conventions for Codes Transmitted from Application

The Terminal Subsystem expects to receive character codes in a
form consistent with the 8-bit coding convention described
earlier in this section.
This is the most efficient coding
convention.
When operating in an 8-bit environment,
your application can
freely use the CO and Cl control codes (including 7-bit code
extensions).
The Terminal Subsystem will always interpret these
codes properly.
When your application sends GL or GR graphic
codes, the Terminal Subsystem interprets these according to the
graphic character mapping currently being used.
In native mode,
the default mapping--set
when
you
power-up
(boot)
the
Professional,
use a reset-to-initial-state (RIS), or use a soft
reset (DECSTR)--is the DEC Multinational Character Set:
ASCII
Graphics in GL and DEC Supplemental Graphics in GR.
In terminal
emulation mode,
the currently selected default--either
DEC
Multinational or one of the National Character Replacement
Sets--is mapped when you enter terminal emulation,
reset the
PRO/Communications
terminal
emulator,
or
use
a
reset-to-initial-state (RIS) command.
The Terminal Subsystem always interprets the 8th bit of any
received character as a legitimate value.
In a 7-bit terminal
emulation environment, this could cause the Terminal Subsystem to
accept invalid data.
To avoid this problem, always choose a
terminal emulation
mode
that
is
compatible
with
your

1-29

WORKING WITH 7- AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS
communication environment.
VT100 mode emulation forces a 7-bit
environment. VT200 mode has a 7- and 8-bit option.

1.5.2

Conventions for Codes Transmitted/Returned to Application

Codes transmitted to an application come primarily from keyboard
input.
In addition some codes are returned in response to
commands such as requests for device identification or status.
Keyboard input includes
•

individual graphic character codes, both 7-bit (GR) and 8-bit
(GL), produced by the standard (printing character) keys.

•

individual control character codes and multibyte sequences
produced by the various function keys.

Multibyte sequences are also returned in response to commands.
Transmission of codes to an application
varies
somewhat,
depending on whether you are operating your Professional in
native mode or in terminal emulation mode.

1.5.2.1 Native Mode - When your Professional operates in native
mode,
the Terminal Subsystem controls how codes are transmitted
to an application. The Terminal Subsystem always transmits all
7-bit (GL) and 8-bit (GR) graphic character codes exactly a3 they
are generated from the keyboard.
Most function keys on the Professional's keyboard generate
multibyte control codes (see Chapter 2). You can express these
codes in 8-bit format starting either with CSI
(9/11) or SS3
(8/15).
You can also express them in the less efficient
7-bit-compatible format, as 7-bit code extensions. This is also
true of returned codes for device status, etc.
You can program the Terminal Subsystem to transmit control codes
in the 8-bit format or their equivalent 7-bit code extensions
prior to transmission. You select the format you want with the
Select
Compatibility Level
(DECSCL)
sequence
(described in
Section 3.5.1), or code extension announcer sequence (described
in Section 3.5.2). The latter is available only in Level 2 mode.

1-30

WORKING WITH 7- AND 8-BIT ENVIRONMENTS
1.5.2.2 Terminal Emulation
Mode - When
you
operate
your
Professional
in terminal emulation mode,
PRO/Communications
controls how codes are transmitted.
The ability
of
the
Professional to handle 8-bit codes in the terminal emulation
modes is a superset feature that may not be compatible with
earlier software.
You determine how codes are handled by selecting an appropriate
terminal
emulation
mode and by properly setting up your
communication line.
If you select either the 7- or 8-bit VT200 mode emulation, you
can send both 7-bit (GL) and 8-bit (GR) graphic codes from the
keyboard to the application, provided you have set up your
communications line to handle 8-bit data.
If you have selected
VT200 emulation mode but the communications line is set up for
7-bit data,
the terminal emulator does not allow an application
running on the remote system to select 8-bit control codes.
If
you enter an 8-bit graphic character from the keyboard, it is not
transmitted.
If you select VTlOO emulation mode, by default only 7-bit control
codes and code extensions are transmitted or returned to the
application. Similarly, only 7-bit graphic codes are transmitted
from the keyboard to the application.
If you enter an 8-bit
graphic character at the keyboard, it is not transmitted.
Be sure to select an emulation mode compatible with your
communications line and the application environment on the host.

1-31

CHAPTER 2
CODES TRANSMITTED FROM KEYBOARD

This chapter describes the codes transmitted to an application
program from the keyboard. All of the text modes of operation
defined in Chapter 1 are covered.
We assume that you are familiar with the character encoding
conventions and terminology covered in Chapter 1, including the
differences related to 7- and 8-bit environments.
Most of the function keys on the keyboard generate multibyte
codes. This chapter documents these codes using 8-bit Cl control
codes rather than their equivalent 7-bit code extensions, because
this is the preferred, most efficient coding convention. Chapter
1 explains how your application can control the representation of
Cl codes sent from the keyboard to satisfy 7-bit or 8-bit
environments.
The chapter covers descriptions of the
follows:

key

codes

generated

• Section 2.1 - modes of operation and key usage
2.2 - the standard keys (the "printing", graphic
• Section
character keys on the main array,
• Section 2.3 - compose sequences

• Section 2.4 - control character keys
• Section 2.5 - top-row function keys

2-1

•

Section 2.6 - editing keypad keys

•

Section 2.7 - auxiliary keypad keys

•

Sections 2.8 - 2.12 - miscellaneous keyboard-related topics

Figure 2-1 shows key groupings.
This chapter uses only the
U.S./Canada keyboard in illustrations. However, it explains all
significant differences among national keyboards.
Appendix B
contains illustrations of all keyboards.

2.1

MODES OF OPERATION AND KEY USAGE

In native and terminal emulation modes, whenever a key is not
available to the application, no code is transmitted when the key
is pressed.
Which keys are available depends on the mode of operation--native
or terminal emulation. Within terminal emulation, which keys are
available depends on the emulation mode selected from the
PRO/Communications menu.
The following sections clarify which keys are available
mode.

2-2

each

MODES OF OPERATION AND KEY USAGE

- - - - - - - - - T o p Row Function K e y s - - - - - - - F11

F12

F13

Addtnl

HoldScrften

Lock

Compose

Wajt

IESC)

(BS)

(LF)

Options

F17

F18

F19

F20

DDDDD DDDDD DODD Bl ~ I DODD
DD[][](][D(][]Li[][[JEJ(]IQJ I

r::l r::l le=--1

DEJEJD[][JLJEJD[][J[][JD•'"'"
DLJEJ[J[JD[]r::JEJ[]DDDD

EJ L:JL:J

/'"··

1[][][]0[][][]~00[]1'"'"

IComoo••
c""'"'~

LJ~L::J
~~

[!]~~
-Editing Keypad

------Main Array------

Figure 2-1:

1°

··''"'"'·

-Auxiliary_
Keypad

ODD•

DLJLJD

DD[][](][D(][]Li[][[JEJ(JEJ

DEJEJD[][JLJEJD[][J[][]D''°'"
DLJEJ[J[JD[][JEJ[]DDDD
1[][][]0[][][]~00[]1'"··

'Comoo"
c""""'

[][][JD
[][][JD""'

Key Groupings (U.S./Canada Keyboard)

DODD•

I'"··

DLJLJD

[][][][]

[][][JD
[][][JD"'"

1°

Legend:

= Key is Not Used
in VT100 or VT52 Modes

Figure 2-2:

Keys Used in VT100 and VT52 Modes

2-3

MODES OF OPERATION AND KEY USAGE
2.1.1

Native Mode

In native mode Levels 1 and 2, all keys are available.
Sections
2.5 and 2.6 explain the interaction of some P/OS routines and the
top row function and editing keys respectively.

2.1.2

Terminal Emulation Mode

2.1.2.1 VT100 Mode - For compatibility
with
VT100
series
terminals, VT100 mode allows only a subset of the keys available
on the Professional keyboa~d to transmit codes to the host.
(See
Figure 2-2.) VT100 mode does not allow the following Professional
keys and key combinations to transmit codes to the communications
line.

•

the six editing keys

•

the top-row function keys except for
<HOLD SCREEN> and <PRINT SCREEN> (always controlled by
P/OS)
<BREAK>, <SET-UP>, and <F5> (controlled by
PRO/Communications in emulation mode)
<Fll (ESC)>, <F12 (BS)>, and <F13 (LF)>

In VT100 mode, the <Fll (ESC)>, <F12 (BS)>, and <F13 (LF}> keys
on the Professional are equivalent to the <ESC>, <BACK SPACE>,
and <LINE FEED> keys on the main array of a VT100 series
terminal.

2.1.3

VT200 Mode

You can use all keys on the keyboard in this mode.
But VT200
mode does not allow the following top row function keys to
transmit codes to the communications line:
•

<HOLD SCREEN> and <PRINT SCREEN> (always controlled by P/OS)

•

<BREAK>, <SET-UP>, and <F5> (controlled by PRO/Communications
in emulation mode)

2-4

MODES OF OPERATION AND KEY USAGE

2.1.4

VT52 Mode

In VT52 mode, you can use the same keys as
Figure 2-2).

VT100

mode

(see

Because VT100 mode is ANSI-compatible and VT52 mode is not,
the
codes generated by some function keys differ.
For example, the
codes produced by the auxiliary keypad keys and the cursor
control keys
(on the editing keypad) are different for VT52 and
VT100 modes.
These differences are identified throughout the manual.
Because
VT100, VT200, and native modes all share the ANSI-compatible
coding conventions, the term "ANSI mode" is used to differentiate
them from VT52 mode.
VT52 key codes not specifically identified as being different are
the same as VT100 mode (see "VT100 mode", above).

2.2

STANDARD KEYS

The standard keys, located on the main array,
generate graphic
characters, either singly or in combination with other keys.
When used with <SHIFT> and <LOCK>, standard keys generate shifted
or uppercase characters, as described further in this section.
When used with <CTRL>,
standard keys generate 7-bit control
characters,
as
described
in Section 2.4.
(<CTRL> takes
precedence over <SHIFT>, which takes precedence over <LOCK>.)
When used with <COMPOSE CHARACTER> and dead keys, standard keys
generate graphic characters that may not be available from the
standard
keys on your keyboard (see Section 2.3,
Compose
Sequences).
On all keyboards, the characters shown on the standard keys and
the codes generated correspond to the default (DEC Multinational)
graphic character mapping:
ASCII Graphics in GL and
DEC
Supplemental
Graphics in GR,
independently of the current
character set selection. Appendix a shows the DEC Multinational
Character Set.
If you select another character set (for example,
DEC Special Graphics in GL), the GL codes would map into the new
graphic character set for display purposes. The standard keys
would no longer indicate the actual graphic characters you create
from the keyboard. On any keyboard you would have to compare the
relative position of DEC Multinational and DEC Special Graphics
characters in the code table to determine what character any key
might produce. Appendix A shows the DEC Special Graphics set.
Chapter 3 describes how to change character sets.

2-5

STANDARD KEYS

The remainder of this chapter assumes
the
default
(DEC
Multinational)
character set mapping: ASCII Graphics in GL and
DEC Supplemental Graphics in GR.
On the U.S./Canada keyboard, the standard keys show only ASCII
characters.
There are no DEC Supplemental characters among the
standard keys.
Thus, these keys generate only ASCII codes.
This is a special case.
Most keyboards have some standard keys
that generate DEC Supplemental as well as ASCII characters (see
the keyboard illustrations in Appendix B).
The standard key
patterns vary among keyboards,
and some graphic characters
(either special symbols or characters with diacritical marks) may
or may not be available as standard keys on various keyboards.
Nevertheless,
on any keyboard,
you
can
create
any
DEC
Multinational graphic character that is not available through a
standard key by using a compose sequence, as described in Section
2. 3.
Regardless of how you create a graphic character (standard key or
compose sequence), and regardless of which keyboard you use, each
character is represented by a unique code according to the
character's position in the code table.
You can use all GL
ct cacters in both 7-bit and 8-bit environments.
You can use GR
characters only in an 8-bit environment.

2.2.1

<SHIFT> Key, <LOCK> Key, Shift-Lock/Caps-Lock Mode

The operations described are identical for all keyboards.
assumed the <CTRL> key is released (up).

If the <SHIFT> key is released and the Lock indicator is turned
off,
any standard key with a single alphabetic character on the
keycap generates the lowercase character. Any standard key with
more than one character on the keycap generates the "lower"
character shown.
See also "Office Mode and Data Processing Mode"
for keys with more than two characters on their keycaps.
When you press <SHIFT>, any standard key with a single alphabetic
character on the keycap generates the uppercase character. Any
standard key with more than one character on the keycap generates
the "upper" character shown.
You
use
the
<LOCK>
key
in
conjunction
with
the
Shift-Lock/Caps-Lock mode on one of the Professional's P/OS Setup
menus.
When Caps-Lock mode is selected, if you press
<LOCK>,
the Lock
indicator turns on and any standard key with a single alphabetic

2-6

S'I'ANDARD KEYS

gene tes the upper ase character.
Any
character on the
standard
th more than one character on the
generates
the lower" characte shown. You disabl
-Lock mode" by
"
This
rns off the Lo k indicator.
pressing <LOCK> agai
When Shi ft-k mode
elected, if you press <LOCK , the Lock
indi
any standard
with a si
e al
turn
tic
character on
generates the uppercase character.
re than one characte on the
generates
standard
racter shovln..
y·ou (ii sable "Sl1i ft-Lock mode n
the "upper
pressing one
the <SHIFT>
'11 he

<LOCK

Sec ion

for

no effe t
on the
use of the <SHIFT

nonstandard
See
with the <PRINT SCREEN>

All

the U.S.

create

co re
i
codes)
i
Processing (DP) Mode has been se ected on a

more than
character (
The

You
codes
nonal

two

one or more
ic characters (and
Office Mode or Data
Se

menu.

Office or Data Processing Mode are shaded in red
illustrati s in
ix B. All such
have
on
their
aps.
The
re generated in DP
in ffice Mode.
(lower character
as for the
other

E
Multinational
ic
You use
on you,r
characters
do not exi t a
There ar
s of compo
s
s:
three-stroke sequence
and two-s rake sequences.
You should
-stroke compose
sequences wheneve
ssible, because
sier to use.
However,
two-s rake sequences reate
in characters and
ards (not ava lable on
na iona.l
You can use th
sequence on a l
rds to create any
DEC Multinational
c character not on your
rd. You
create a three-s rake sequence
first pressing
<
se
Character
and then pressing two standard
whose characters
form
valid sequence.

2-7

COMPOSE SEQUENCES
Two-stroke sequences are faster to use
than
three-stroke
sequences but are limited to characters with the following
diacritical marks:
grave accent,
acute accent, circumflex,
tilde, and diaeresis (umlaut).
You don't use the <COMPOSE
CHARACTER> key in a two-stroke sequence.
Instead, you use a dead
diacritical key (also known as dead key) to both initiate the
sequence and enter a diacritical mark. You then enter a standard
character that, together with that diacritical mark, results in a
legitimate DEC Multinational character.
Dead keys are available on all but the U.S./Canada keyboard.
(Dead keys are shaded in gray in the keyboard illustrations in
Appendix B). Dead keys vary among keyboards according to the
relative usage of characters with diacritical marks. What may be
a dead key on one keyboard may not be one on another. Also, only
one of several characters shown on a keycap may be a dead key
character.
Table 2-1 lists all valid compose sequences.
Because
of
variations among keyboards, you can create characters listed in
Column 1 of Table 2-1 in one or more ways:
•

with a standard key (if it is available on that keyboard)

•

with a three-stroke compose sequence (always)

•

with a two-stroke compose sequence (if the dead key is
available on that keyboard)

In all cases, the resultant code sent to the application is the
DEC Multinational code for that graphic character (column 2 of
Table 2-1).
Use of the <SHIFT> and <LOCK> keys and of Office and DP modes
compose sequences is as defined for the standard keys.
The next two sections state the rules for
three-stroke and two-stroke composes sequences.

2.3.1

creating

Creating a Three-Stroke Compose Sequence

To create a three-stroke compose sequence:
1.

Find the desired character in column 1 of Table 2-1.

2-8

valid

COMPOSE SEQUENCES
2.

Press <COMPOSE CHARACTER>. The Compose indicator turns on,
showing you are in compose mode.

Type the two required characters from column 3.

For example, to create E with acute accent, press <Compose
Character>, then type E and then apostrophe ('), in any order.
When a valid sequence is completed, the Compose indicator turns
off, and the resultant character code (column 2) is sent to the
application.
If the sequence consists of two alphabetic characters, the case
of both must be the same (upper or lower) and determines the case
of the resultant character, if relevant.
Table 2-2 summarizes
how the Professional handles all valid and invalid conditions.

2.3.2

Creating a Two-Stroke Compose Sequence

To form a two-stroke sequence (applies to
U. S . /Canada ) :

all

keyboards

except

Find the desired character in column 1 of Table 2-1.

Verify from column 4 that it can be created with a two-stroke
sequence.

Verify from Appendix B that your keyboard has a dead key for
the needed diacritical mark.

Press the dead key to enter the diacritical mark. The
Compose indicator turns on, showing you are in compose mode.

Type the remaining character indicated in column 4.

For example, to create E with a grave accent on a Danish
keyboard, press the dead key that has the grave accent and then
type E.
When a valid sequence is completed, the Compose indicator turns
off, and the resultant character code (columns 2) is sent to the
application. Table 2-2 summarizes how the Professional handles
all valid and invalid conditions.

2-9

COMPOSE S

2,3.3

Aborting or Restarti

uence

If you enter compose mode inadver
either
pressing
<COMPOSE CHARACTER>
or a dead
press the Delete
to
immediate
terminate the compose sequence and exit compose mode.
No code is transmitted to the
ication.
If you press <COMPOSE CHARACTER> during a compose sequence, a new
three-stroke sequence is started from that point. The previous
sequence is aborted with no effect on the application.
If you
press a dead key during a compose sequence, the action is as
indicated in Table 2-2.

2.3.4

about Dead

The illustrations in Appendix B show that some
rds have
keys that contain both a standard and a dead character. As with
standard
, you select the character you want with the <SHIFT>
and <LOCK>
and the appropriate modes on the
Setup
menus. You must be in native mode to use a P/OS Se
menu.
Some keys may appear to be dead
characters on their
aps (',
diacritical marks. However, these
generate their own unique ASCII gr

because

have ASCII
") that look like
are standard
that
c character codes.

By themselves, diacritical marks are not DEC Multinational
characters. When a DEC Multinational character has a diacritical
mark, it is the entire character (including the mark)
that is
assigned a unique code. Similarly, dead keys do not generate a
code
themselves. They must be used with a standard character,
either a printing character or the "space" character (2/0).
If a dead key is used within a three-stroke compose sequence, the
diacritical mark is treated as if it were its "equivalent" ASCII
character, defined as follows.
Diacritical Mark

Equivalent ASCII Character

diaeresis (umlaut)
acute accent
grave accent
circumflex
tilde

double quote
apostrophe
grave accent
circumflex
tilde

See Table 2-2 for more information.

2-10

(2/2)
(2/7)
(6/0)
(5/14)
(7/14)

COMPOSE SEQUENCES
Table 2-1
Valid Compose Sequences
In three-stroke sequences, the order in which required characters are entered does not matter unless
otherwise stated. All two-stroke sequences are order sensitive.
Characters Required in Sequence

(1)
Resultant
Character

(2)
Resultant
Code

(3)
Three-Stroke
Sequence

(4)
Two-Stroke
Sequence

(quotation mark)

2/02

" (sp)

(number sign)

2/03

(apostrophe)

2/07

, (sp)

(commercial at)

4/00

a a or AA

(opening bracket)

5/11

( (

(backslash)

5/12

(closing bracket)

5/13

) )

(circumflex accent)

5/14

/\ (sp)

(grave accent)

6/00

' (sp)

(opening brace)

7 /11

( -

(vertical line)

7/12

I /\

(closing brace)

7/13

) -

(tilde)

7/14

- (sp)

(inverted !)

10/01

! !

(cent sign)

10/02

c I or
or c I

I-

L-

(pound sign)

10/03

, (sp)

- (sp)

or Cl

(yen sign)

10/05

y - or Yor y = or Y=

(section sign)

10/07

s 0 or
or s 0 or

).:(

(currency sign)

10/08

x 0 or XO
or x 0 or x 0

(copyright sign)

10/09

co or
or c 0 or

.!!.

(feminine ordinal indicator)

10/10

(angle quotation mark left)

10/11

( (

so
s0

co
c0

2-11

or A_

COMPOSE SEQUENCES

Table

2-1 (Cont.)
Characters Required in Sequence
(1)
Resultant
Character

(2)
Resultant
Code

(3)
Three-Stroke
Sequence

(degree sign)

11/00

0 /\

(plus/minus sign)

11/01

(superscript 2)

11/02

2 /\

(superscript 3)

11/03

3 /\

(micro sign)

11 /05

I u or / U (order

(4)
Two-Stroke
Sequence

sensitive)
(paragraph sign)

11/06

(middle dot)

11/07

(superscript 1)

11/09

1 /\

(masculine ordinal
indicator)

11/10

o _or 0 _

(angle quotation mark
right)

1/11

) )

1/4

(fraction one-quarter)

11 /12

4 (order sensitive)

1/2

(fraction one-half)

11 /13

1 2 (order sensitive)

(inverted ?)

11 /15

? ?

;,..

(A grave)

12/00

A '

, A

;,.

(A acute)

12/01

•A

(A circumflex)

12/02

A /\

/\ A

(A tilde)

12/03

A-

-A

(A umlaut)

12/04

(A ring)

12/05

A *

or A 0 (degree

sign)
A:

(A E ligature)

12/06

A E (order sensitive)

(C cedilla)

12/07

(E grave)

12/08

E ,

, E

i§

(E acute)

12/09

(E circumflex)

12/10

E /\

/\ E

(E umlaut)

12/11

" E

2-12

COMPOSE SEQUENCES

Table 2-1 (Cont.)

Characters Required in Sequence
(1)

(2)

Resultant
Code

(3)
Three-Stroke
Sequence

(4)

Resultant
Character
(I grave)

12/12

I ,

' I

(I acute)

12/13

I ,

' I

(I circumflex)

12/14

I /\

/\ I

(I umlaut)

12/15

(Ntilde)

13/01

N-

-N

(Ograve)

13/02

0 '

' 0

(0 acute)

13/03

O•

·o

(0 circumflex)

13/04

0 /\

/\ 0

(Otilde)

13/05

-o

(Oumlaut)

13/06

(0 E ligature)

13/07

0 E (order sensitive)

(])

(0 slash)

13/08

(U grave)

13/09

u '

' u

(U acute)

13/10

' u

(U circumflex)

13/11

u /\

/\ u

(U umlaut)

13/12

(Y umlaut)

13/13

(German small sharps)

13/15

s s

(a grave)

14/00

' a

(a acute)

14/01

a '

' a

(a circumflex)

14/02

/\ a

(a tilde)

14/03

-a

(a umlaut)

14/04

" a

(a ring)

14/05

a • or a 0 (degree
sign)

(a e ligature)

14/06

a e (order sensitive)

(c cedilla)

14/07

2-13

Two-Stroke
Sequence

COMPOSE SEQUENCES

Table 2-1 (Cont.)
Characters Required in Sequence
(1)
Resultant
Character

(2)
Resultant
Code

(3)
Three-Stroke
Sequence

(4)
Two-Stroke
Sequence

(e grave)

14/08

' e

(e acute)

14/09

' e

(e circumflex)

14/10

/\ e

(e umlaut)

14/11

e "

" e

(i grave)

14/12

(i acute)

14/13

i '

(i circumflex)

14/14

i /\

/\ i

(i umlaut)

14/15

(n tilde)

15/01

n -

- n

(o grave)

15/02

0 '

(o acute)

15/03

' 0

(o circumflex)

15/04

/\ 0

(otilde)

15/05

-o

(o umlaut)

15/06

(o e ligature)

15/07

o e (order sensitive)

r/J

(o slash)

15/08

o I

(u grave)

15/09

(u acute)

15/10

u '

(u circumflex)

15/11

/\ u

(u umlaut)

15/12

u "

" u

(y umlaut)

15/13

y "

" y

2-14

COMPOSE SEQUENCES
Table 2-2
Valid and Invalid Compose Sequence Summary

Three-stroke sequence: COMPOSE CHARACTER, key X, key Y
Two-stroke sequence: dead key, key Z

Condition

Action

1. X, Y, Z are valid characters per
Column 3 or 4 of Table 2-1

Valid sequence: Resultant code is sent to application.

2. X, Y, Z are standard characters

Invalid sequence: Fails after second key. Bell
sounds, if enabled. Exit compose mode. Nothing
is sent to application or displayed on screen.

but do not conform to Table 2-1
3. X, Y, or Z is a dead key

Diacritical mark on dead key is treated as if it
were its "equivalent" ASCII character, defined as
follows:

Diacritical Mark
diaeresis
acute accent
grave accent
circumflex
tilde

Equivalent ASCII Char.
double quote " (2/2)
apostrophe ' (2/7)
grave accent ' (6/0)
circumflex A (5/14)
tilde - (7 /14)

Sequence is then handled per item 1 or 2, above,
and may be valid or invalid.
5. X, Y, or Z is a non-standard key
or key combination (e.g. TAB,
RETURN, CTRL/sequence, toprow function key, editing keypad
key, auxiliary keypad key)

Invalid sequence: Fails immediately. Sequence
handled per item 2, above. The non-standard
code is then interpreted as if it were external to
the sequence and is handled normally, as defined
elsewhere in this chapter.

6. X, Y, or Z is DEL

Exit compose mode. Nothing is sent to application or displayed on screen.

7. X, Y, or Z is COMPOSE CHARACTER

New three-stroke sequence is started. Nothing is
sent to application or displayed on screen.

2.4

KEYS USED TO GENERATE 7-BIT CONTROL CHARACTERS

You can generate 7-bit (CO) control characters in three ways from
any keyboard.
Brief descriptions of each character are in
Appendix A.
1.

In all modes of operation, you can generate the Horizontal
Tab (HT, 0/9), Carriage Return (CR, 0/13), or Delete (DEL,
7/15) codes by pressing dedicated function keys on the main
array:
<TAB>, <RETURN>, <XI (delete) .
•

The code generated by <RETURN> depends on the set/reset
state of Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM).
Chapter 3
describes using this mode. When LNM is reset, <RETURN>
generates CR only. When LNM is set, <RETURN> generates
2-15

KEYS USED TO GENERATE 7-BIT CONTROL CHARACTERS
CR followed by LF.
In the terminal emulation modes, you
can also set and reset LNM manually from a
PRO/Communications menu. Refer to the PRO/Communications
User's Guide for details.
•

Depending on the state of Auxiliary Keypad Mode
(DECKPNM/DECKPAM), <RETURN> and <ENTER> (on the auxiliary
keypad) may generate the same control codes. Refer to
Chapter 3 for information on using the DECKPNM and
DECKPAM commands.

In VT100 and VT52 modes, you can generate the ESC (1/11), BS
(0/8), and LF (0/10) codes directly, by pressing top-row
function keys <F11 (ESC)>, <F12 (BS)>, and <F13 (LF)>,
respectively. This feature is provided for compatibility
with VT100 series terminals. There are no Escape, Backspace,
or Line Feed keys on the main array of the Professional
keyboard.

In all modes of operation, you can generate any of the 32 CO
7-bit control characters, plus DEL, from the keyboard by
simultaneously pressing the <CTRL> key and a specified
standard key.

Table 2-3 lists the keys and key combinations used to generate
7-bit control characters for all modes of operation. These keys
and combinations are valid on all keyboards. Note that there are
differences between the Professional and a VT102 terminal in the
way you generate 7-bit control characters with the <CTRL> key.
There is no similar mechanism for generating Cl
characters.

(8-bit)

control

Invalid key combinations cause the bell to sound if enabled.
error code is returned to the application.

2-16

KEYS USED TO GENERATE 7-BIT CONTROL CHARACTERS
Table 2-3
Keys Used to Generate 7-bit Control Characters

Code

Key Pressed with
CTRL (all modes)

Key Pressed with
CTRL
(VT102 terminal)

NUL

0/00

Space bar

SOH

0/01

STX

0/02

ETX

0/03

EOT

0/04

ENO

0/05

ACK

0/06

BEL

0/07

0/08

Control
Character
Mnemonic

0/09

0/10

Dedicated
Function Key

F12 (BS)*
TAB

0/11

0/12

0/13

0/14

0/15

OLE

1/00

DC1

1/01

DC2

1/02

DC3

1/03

DC4

1/04

NAK

1/05

SYN

1/06

ETB

1/07

CAN

1/08

v
w
x

1/09

SUB

1/10

ESC

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

DEL

7 /15

F13 (LF)*

RETURN

F11 (ESC)*

?
DELETE

* Keys F11, F12, and F13 generate these 7-bit control characters only when the Professional is operated

in VT100 and VT52 modes.

2-17

TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS

2.5

TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS

The function keys at the top row of the keyboard generate the
codes listed in Table 2-4.
The following paragraphs provide
additional details on these keys.
The <HOLD SCREEN> and <PRINT SCREEN> keys are always reserved for
their intended functions, and their codes are never available to
your application.
These keys function the same in native and
emulation modes.
Pressing <HOLD SCREEN> turns on the Hold Screen indicator and
suspends output to the display until you press <HOLD SCREEN>
again.
Pressing <CTRL>/<HOLD SCREEN> also suspends output and
turns on the indicator.
In addition,
it blanks the screen.
Pressing any key restores the screen, but you must press <HOLD
SCREEN> again to resume output.
Because pressing any key except
<CTRL> or <HOLD SCREEN> generates a code, it is recommended that
you use one of these two keys to restore the screen.
You can use the <PRINT SCREEN> key only if a printer is connected
to the Professional.
There are three options:
•

Pressing <PRINT SCREEN> prints the screen in text mode.

•

Pressing the <SHIFT>/<PRINT SCREEN> prints the screen in
graphics mode, assuming your printer supports sixel output.

•

Pressing <CTRL>/<PRINT SCREEN> toggles the autoprint mode.
autoprint mode prints each line after the cursor leaves the
line.

Refer to the description of the printing commands
for more information.

Chapter

The <BREAK>, <SET-UP>,
and <F5> keys operate differently in
native and terminal emulation modes.
In native mode these keys
transmit the control sequences listed in Table 2-4.
Pressing
<SET-UP> manually unlocks the keyboard, if it has been locked.
In terminal emulation mode, these keys perform several functions.
The <BREAK> key functions in one of three ways:
•

Pressing <BREAK> does one of the following, depending on your
selection in Setup:
Does nothing, in effect a dead key.

2-18

TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS
Performs a "short" break on the communications line.
Performs a "long" break on the communications line.
•

Pressing <SHIFT>/<BREAK> performs a communications line
disconnect.

•

Pressing <CTRL>/<BREAK> issues an answerback message, if you
have defined one.

In terminal emulation mode, pressing <SET-UP> or <SHIFT>/<SET-UP>
displays the PRO/Communications setup menus.
In terminal emulation mode, pressing <F5> puts the Professional
in local command mode.
Local command mode restores standard P/OS
functions to some of the top-row function keys,
for example
<EXIT>.
To
exit
this
mode,
press <RESUME>.
See the
PRO/Communications User's Guide for complete details on local
command mode.
In native mode, some of the top-row function keys 6 through 20
are used with P/OS routines related to menus, forms, and HELP
frames (see the Tool Kit User's Guide).
The codes listed are
available to your application whenever the associated P/OS
routines are not active. See the P/OS System Reference Manual
for a complete description of the <INTERRUPT> key when used with
various keys, including <DO>.
In terminal emulation modes, the functions of keys 6 through 20
depends on the emulation mode you select.
In VTlOO and VT52
modes, keys <Fll (ESC)>, <F12 (BS)>, and <F13 (LF)> function like
the <ESC>,
<BACK SPACE>, and <LINE FEED> keys on the main array
of a VTlOO series terminal and generate the corresponding 7-bit
codes:
ESC (l/11), BS (0/8), and LF (0/10).
The remaining keys
in the 6 through 20 range are dead.
In both VT200 emulation modes,
function keys 6 through 20
generate the escape sequences listed in Table 2-4.
In addition,
there is a shifted form of these keys. When you press <SHIFT>
with function keys 6 through 20, they generate User Defined Keys
(UDKs) if you have defined them.
Chapter 4 explains User Defined
Keys in detail.

2-19

TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS

Table 2-4
Codes Generated by Top Row Function Keys
Code Generated
Name on
Legend Strip

Generic
Name

HOLD SCREEN

PRINT SCREEN

BREAK

F3
9/11
CSI

Native Mode

VT100/VT52
Modes

Native/VT200 Modes

3/1
1

3/3
3

7/14

Break

Terminal Emu!. Modes

Break

9/11
CSI

3/1
1

3/4
4

7/14

SET-UP

9/11
CSI

3/1
1

3/5
5

7/14

3/7
7

7/14

9/11
CSI

3/1

INTERRUPT

9/11
CSI

3/1
1

3/8
8

7/14

RESUME

9/11
CSI

3/1
1

3/9
9

7/14

CANCEL

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/0
0

7/14

MAIN SCREEN

F10

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/1
1

7/14

EXIT

F11

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/3
3

7/14

F11 (ESC)

1/11
ESC

F12

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/4
4

7/14

F12 (BS)

0/8
BS

F13

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/5
5

7/14

F13 (LF)

0/10
LF

F14

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/6
6

7/14

ADDTNL OPTIONS

F15

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/8
8

7/14

HELP

F16

9/11
CSI

3/2
2

3/9
9

7/14

F17

9/11
CSI

3/3
3

3/1
1

7/14

F17

F18

9/11
CSi

3/3
3

3/2
2

7/14

F18

2-20

TOP-ROW FUNCTION KEYS
Table

2-4 (Cont.)

Code Generated
Name on
Legend Strip

Generic
Name

F19

F20

2.6

EDITING KEYPAD

VT100/VT52
Modes

Native/VT200 Modes

9/11
CSI

3/3
3

7/14

3/3
3

3/4
4

7/14

This keypad has six editing keys and four cursor control keys.
In native mode,
some of these keys are used with P/OS routines
related to menus, forms, and HELP frames (see the Tool Kit User's
Guide).
The codes listed here are available to your application
whenever the associated P/OS routines are not active.

2.6.1

Editing Keys

The six editing keys can be used only in native and VT200 modes.
No codes from these keys are transmitted to the application in
VT100 or VT52 modes. Table 2-5 lists the codes generated by the
editing keys for all modes of operation.

2-21

EDITING KEYPAD

Table 2-5
Codes Generated by Editing Keys

Key

9/11

FIND

CSI
INSERT HERE

9/11
CSI

9/11

REMOVE

CSI

9/11

SELECT

CSI
PREV SCREEN

9/11
CSI

NEXT SCREEN

9/11
CSI

2.6.2

VT100/VT52
Modes

Native/VT200 Modes

3/1
1

7/14

3/2
2

7/14

3/3
3

7/14

3/4
4

7/14

3/5
5

7/14

3/6
6

7/14

Cursor Control Keys

You can use the cursor control keys in
modes.
The codes generated by these
Professional is being operated in
(native, VT100 or VT200 modes) or in
mode.

2-22

native and all emulation
keys depend on whether the
an ANSI-compatible
mode
the ANSI-incompatible VT52

EDITING KEYPAD

Table 2-6 shows
control keys.

the

possible

codes

generated

the

cursor

Table 2-6
Codes Generated by Cursor Control Keys
ANSI Mode A

Key

VT52 Mode A

Cursor Key Mode
Reset
(Cursor control) 8

Cursor Key Mode
Set
(Application) c

9/11
CSI

4/1
A

8/15
SS3

4/1
A

1/11
ESC

4/1
A

9/11
CSI

4/2
B

8/15
SS3

4/2
B

1/11
ESC

4/2
B

9/11
CSI

4/3

8/15
SS3

4/3

1/11
ESC

4/3
C

9/11
CSI

4/4

8/15
SS3

4/4

1/11
ESC

4/4
D

A. ANSI mode applies to all modes except VT52 mode. VT52 mode is an ANSI-incompatible subset

of VT100 mode.

2.7

AUXILIARY KEYPAD

You can use the auxiliary keypad keys in native and all emulation
modes.
The codes generated by these keys depend on whether the
Professional is being operated in an ANSI-compatible
mode
(native, VT100, or VT200 modes) or in VT52 mode.
Table 2-7 shows the possible codes
keypad keys.

generated

the

auxiliary

In both ANSI and VT52 modes,
the codes generated depend on
whether the auxiliary keypad is being used in application mode or
numeric mode.
In numeric mode the auxiliary keypad keys generate
the numeric,
comma, period, and minus sign character codes used
by the corresponding standard keys.
In application mode,
the
keypad keys generate control codes that you can use and interpret
specifically for your application.
In ANSI mode, you select keypad application mode with the DECKPAM
sequence, and keypad numeric mode with the DECKPNM sequence.
Refer to Chapter 3 for the ANSI-compatible and Appendix E for
VT52-compatible commands needed to select keypad application mode
and keypad numeric mode.

2-23

AUXILIARY KEYPAD
Table 2-7
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys

ANSI Mode A

VT52 Mode A

Key

Keypad
Numeric Mode

Keypad
Application Mode

Keypad ·
Numeric Mode

Keypad
Application Mode

3/0
0

8/15
SS3

7/0
p

3/0
0

1/11
ESC

3/15

3/1
1

8/15
SS3

7 /1
q

3/1
1

1/11
ESC

3/15

3/2
2

8/15
S3

7/2

3/2
2

1/11
ESC

3/3
3

8/15
SS3

7/3
s

3/3
3

1/11
ESC

3/15

3/4
4

8/15
SS3

7/4
t

3/4
4

1/11
ESC

3/15

7/4

3/5
5

8/15
SS3

7/5
u

3/5
5

1/11
ESC

3/15

7/5
u

3/6
6

8/15
SS3

7/6

3/6
6

1/11
ESC

3/15

7/6

3/7
7

8/15
SS3

1/11
ESC

7/7

3/7
7

3/15

3/8
8

8/15
SS3

7/8
x

3/8
8

1/11
ESC

3/15

7/8
x

3/9
9

8/15
SS3

7/9
y

3/9
9

1/11
ESC

2/13
- (minus)

8/15
SS3

6/13
m

2/13

1/11
ESC

3/15

2/12
, (comma)

8/15
SS3

6/12
I

2/12

1/11
ESC

3/15

2/14
. (period)

8/15
SS3

6/14
n

2/14

0/13
CR

8/15
SS3

4/13
M

0/13
CR

Enter C

or 0/13
CR

v
7/7

or 0/13
CR

0/10

1/11
ESC
1/11
ESC
0/10

A. ANSI mode applies to all modes except VT52 mode. VT52 mode is an ANSI-incompatible subset of VT100
mode.
B. You cannot generate these sequences on a VT52 terminal.
C. In Keypad Numeric Mode, ENTER generates the same codes as RETURN. You can change the code
generated by RETURN with the Linefeed/New Line Mode. When reset, the Linefeed/New Line Mode
causes RETURN to generate a single control character (CR). When set, the mode causes RETURN to
generate two control characters (CR,LF).

2-24

7/0
p

7 /1
q

3/15

7/2

?
3/15

3/15

?
3/15

7/3
s

7/9
y
6/13 B
m
6/12 B
I
6/14
n
4/13
M

AUXILIARY KEYPAD

Table

2-7 (Cont.)
ANSI Mode A

VT52ModeA

Key

Keypad
Numeric Mode

Keypad
Application Mode

Keypad
Numeric Mode

Keypad
Application Mode

8/15
SS3

5/0

8/15
SS3

1/11
ESC

5/0

1/11
ESC

5/0

PF1

8/15
SS3

5/1

1/11
ESC

5/1

1/11
ESC

5/1

PF2

8/15
SS3

1/11
ESC

5/2

1/11
ESC

5/2

PF3

PF4

8/15
SS3

5/2

5/3

5/0
p

8/15
SS3

5/1

8/15
SS3

5/2

8/15
SS3

5/3

1/11
ESC

5/3

1/11
ESC

5/3 B

A. ANSI mode applies to all modes except VT52 mode. VT52 mode is an ANSI-incompatible subset of VT100
mode.
B. You cannot generate these sequences on a VT52 terminal.
C. In Keypad Numeric Mode, ENTER generates the same codes as RETURN. You can change the code
generated by RETURN with the Linefeed/New Line Mode. When reset, the Linefeed/New Line Mode cause
RETURN to generate a single control character (CR). When set, the mode causes RETURN to generate
two control characters (CR,LF).

2.8
2.8.1

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE KEYBOARD
Locking the Keyboard

When the keyboard is locked, no codes can be transmitted from the
keyboard to the application
(and/or to the host system in the
terminal emulation modes).
To alert the user,
whenever the
keyboard is locked, the Wait indicator at the top of the keyboard
is turned on and the keyclick feature is disabled.
The keyboard can become locked under the following conditions:
•

In all modes, if the application sends a command to set
Keyboard Action Mode (KAM), the keyboard locks immediately
and sends no further keyboard input to the application.
Chapter 3 describes the KAM command.

•

A DC3 control character (1/3, also known as XOFF) sent to the
Professional also locks the keyboard.
However, the exact
action depends on the mode of operation, as described below.
A DC1 control character (1/1, also known as XON) sent to the
Professional clears DC3.

2-25

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE KEYBOARD
In native mode, the keyboard locks immediately and no
further keyboard input is sent to the application. This
is the only response to DC3 in native mode.
In terminal emulation modes, the host system will send
DC3 to the Professional if it cannot handle any further
input from the Professional at that moment. When the
host can accept more input, it clears DC3 by sending DCl
to the Professional. The response of the Professional to
DC3 and DCl depends on whether XON/XOFF recognition has
been enabled or disabled through a PRO/Communications
setup menu.
If XON/XOFF recognition is enabled, when the host or
application sends DC3, no more characters are transmitted
to the host. A type-ahead buffer temporarily stores any
additional characters generated from the Professional
keyboard. The capacity of the buffer is 256 characters.
If the host sends DCl before the buffer fills up,
transmission is enabled, and the stored characters are
sent to the host.
If the buffer fills up before the host
can clear DC3, the keyboard locks for the next and
subsequent characters. No more characters can be
generated from the keyboard.
If XON/XOFF recognition is disabled, PRO/Communications
discards the DC3.

2.8.2

Unlocking the Keyboard

You can unlock the keyboard by doing the following:
1.

Reset KAM, if it has been set, and/or

Clear any uncleared DC3 command with a DCl command.

The Wait indicator is turned off
unlocked.

soon

the

keyboard

You can manually unlock the keyboard as follows.
The procedure
is different for native mode and for the terminal emulation
modes.
•

In native mode, press the <SET-UP> key. Note that the
<SET-UP> key also sends its own code to the application (see
Section 2.5), so this method may cause unwanted side effects.

2-26

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE KEYBOARD

•

In terminal emulation modes, press the <SET-UP> key, then
press the <RESUME> key.

2.9

ENABLING AND DISABLING AUTOREPEAT

You can enable the autorepeat feature either by selecting
Autorepeat On through the P/OS Terminal Setup Menu, or by setting
Autorepeat Mode
(DECARM)
in your application.
You disable
autorepeat either by selecting Autorepeat Off on the Setup Menu
or by resetting DECARM in your application. Chapter 3 describes
the use of the DECARM command.
The autorepeat rate is 30 keystrokes (not characters generated)
per second.
Some repeating keys,
such as the cursor keys,
generate more than one character per keystroke.
If autorepeat is enabled, keys function as follows:
•

The Delete key and the four cursor keys on the editing keypad
automatically repeat if pressed longer than 0.3 second.

•

All standard keys and all auxiliary keypad keys automatically
repeat if pressed longer than 0.5 second.

•

If two or more keys are held down, the most recently
depressed key autorepeats.

The <RETURN> key, top row function keys, and 6
not autorepeat.

2.10

editing

keys

BELL SIGNAL

You disable and enable the keyboard bell from the P/OS Terminal
Setup Menu.
If you select Bell Off on the Setup Menu, no bell
sound will be generated under any conditions.
If you enable the
bell by selecting high, medium, or low (volume level), the bell
will sound under any of the following conditions:
•

If you send a BEL code (0/7) to the Professional, either from
the keyboard (<CTRL>/<G>) or from the application.

•

If you selected Margin Bell On from the P/OS Terminal Setup
menu and you try to type characters past the right margin.

2-27

BELL SIGNAL

•

If the keyboard input is invalid in the current context.
following are examples of invalid input:

The

Using an invalid compose sequence.
Entering an 8-bit code when the communication line is in
7-bit mode.

2.11

MONITOR SCREEN BLANKING AND RESTORE

Any display on the screen disappears (screen will go blank)
if
there has been no activity in the Terminal Subsystem for 30
minutes.
This includes keyboard input and any other code
processing on the part of the Terminal Subsystem, whether
displayable on the screen or not. This is to reduce the chance
of damage to the screen phosphor from a fixed display, such as a
menu.
The original screen image redisplays automatically as soon as you
press any key on the keyboard.
This includes keys like <CTRL>,
<SHIFT>, and <COMPOSE CHARACTER> which do not by themselves
transmit codes to the application.
Pressing the <CTRL> key is
the recommended way of redisplaying the image.
The image also
redisplays if the Terminal Subsystem receives any codes from any
source, including characters and sequences that do not normally
affect the display.
You can temporarily blank the screen by pressing <CTRL>/<HOLD
SCREEN>.
Besides blanking the screen, this causes output to the
screen to be suspended. When you press <HOLD SCREEN> again,
the
screen image redisplays and output to the screen resumes.

2-28

CHAPTER 3
RESPONSE OF PROFESSIONAL TO RECEIVED CODES

This chapter describes the Professional's response to
may receive from an application or a host system when
in text mode.
It is assumed you are familiar with the
encoding conventions and terminology covered in Chapter

codes it
operating
character
1.

This chapter covers only the ANSI-compatible text modes,
namely
native mode, VT100 mode, and VT200 mode.
The ANSI-incompatible
VT52 mode is treated separately in Appendix E.
Differences in
response between native and terminal emulation modes and between
Level 1 and Level 2 are pointed out throughout the chapter.
All data received by the Professional in text mode consists of
single- and multiple-character codes:
graphic
(printing or
display) characters, control characters,
escape sequences,
and
control sequences.
Much of that data consists of graphic
characters that simply appear on the screen with no other effect.
Control characters,
escape sequences, and control sequences are
all "control functions" that you use in your application to
specify how the Professional should process,
transmit,
and
display characters.
Each control function has a unique name and
each
name has a unique abbreviation.
Both the name and
abbreviation are standardized. Abbreviations are in the form of
mnemonics to help you remember them.
This chapter covers the
control characters, escape sequences and control sequences that
the Professional recognizes, both in native and emulated modes.
By default, the Professional interprets individual control and
graphic character codes according to the 8-bit DEC Multinational
Character Set code mapping (see Table 3-1).
The Professional also responds to control strings.
A control
string is a delimited string of characters which occurs in a data
stream for control purposes.
Chapter 4 covers the control
strings recognized by the Professional in both native and
terminal emulation mode.

3-1

Table 3-1
DEC Multinational Character Set (CO and GL Codes)

BITS

....-

ROW

b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

NUL

0
0
0

SOH

1
1
1

0 0

STX

2
2
2

ETX

EOT

ENO

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5

6
7

ACK
BEL

7
7
7

100
64
40

120
80
50

140
96
60

160
112
70

21
17
11

41
33
21

61
49
31

101
65
41

121
81
51

141
97
61

161
113
71

DC2

22
18
12

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

162
114
72

DC3
IXOFFI

23
19
13

63
51
33

DC4

24
20
14

64
52
34

104
68
44

NAK

25
21
15

45
37
25

65
53
35

105
69
45

46
38
26

66
54
36

47
39
27

67
55
37

IXONI

SYN

26
22

11
9
9

31
25
19

1 0

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
1A

13
11
8

ESC

14
15

14
12

16
14

17
15
F

33
27

FS
GS

34
28
1C
35
29

36
30
1E

37
31
1F

E
1

164
116
74

125
85
55

145
101
65

165
117
75

106
70
46

126
86
56

146
102
66

166
118
76

107
71
47

70
56
38

110
72
48

71
57
39

72
58
3A

73
59
38

74
60
3C

75
61
30

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

57
47
2F

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

51
41
29

)

1 1

144
100
64

(

CAN

15
13
0

124
84
54

50
40
28

163
115
73

30
24
18

*
+

52
123

98
62

ETB

142

143
99
63

103

122
82

43
35
23

27
23
17

1 0

60
48
30

1
0

10
8
8

40
32
20

DC1

20
16

1
0

OLE

5
6
6
6

0
1

1
1

0
1

0
0

COLUMN

52
42
2A
53
43
28
54
44
2C
55
45

;

67
43

83
53

127
87
57

167
119
77

131
89
59

151
105
69

171
121
79

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

[

133
91
58

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

134
92
5C

154
108
6C

174
124
7C

]

135
93
50

155
109
60

}

175
125
70

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

111
73
49

112
74
4A
113

115

170
120
78

114
76
4C

103
67
150
104
68

130
88
58

75
48

147

172

DEL

122
7A

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

r--co C O D E S - - - - - - - - - - - - ( A S CGLCODES
ll GRAPHICS)----------!

KEY
CHARACTER

ESC

__ ....
27

...._

18
..__

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

3-2

Table 3-1
DEC Multinational Character Set (C1 and GR Codes)

0
0
0

200
128
80

DCS

220
144
90

201
129
81

PU1

221
145
91

202
130
82

PU2

203
131
83

STS

IND

204
132
84

CCH 148

NEL

205
133
85

225
149
95

SSA

206
134
86

SPA

226
150
96

ESA

207
135
87

EPA

227
151
97

HTS

210
136
88

230
152
98

HTJ

211
137
89

231
153
99

VTS

212
13B
BA

232
154
9A

PLO

213
139
BB

233
155
9B

240
160
AO

bl
1

BITS
b6

b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

260
176
BO

'
A

300
192

320
208
DO

340
224
EO

360
240
FO

361
241
F1

362
242
F2

363
243
F3

364
244
F4

365
245
F5

366
246
F6

301
193
Cl

321
209
01

302
194
C2

322
210
02

342
226
E2

303
195
C3

343
227
E3

264
180
B4

••
A

304
196
C4

324
212
04

344
22B
E4

325
213
05

345
229
E5

261
177
B1

222
146
92

242
162
A2

262
178
B2

223
147
93

243
163
A3

244
164
A4

b8
1

241
161
Al

COLUMN

1
1

224

CSI

1
1

0
1

0
0

1
0

263
179
B3

323
211
03

-..

341
225
E1

'0
,
A

ROW

245
165
A5

265
181
B5

305
197
C5

246
166
A6

266
182
B6

IE.

306
19B
C6

••
0

326
214
06

346
230
E6

247
167
A7

267
183
B7

307
199

327
215
07

347
231
E7

367
247
F7

:0:

250
168
AB

270
184
BB

'
E

310
200
CB

330
216
OB

350
232
EB

370
248
FB

251
169
A9

271
185
B9

311
201
C9

'
u

331
217
09

351
233
E9

371
249
F9

252
170
AA

272
1B6
BA

312
202
CA

332
21B
DA

352
234
EA

372
250
FA

••
E

313
203
CB

373
251
FB

374
252
FC

375
253
FD

376
254
FE

377
255
FF

1 1

253
171
AB

PLU

214
140
SC

234
156
9C

254
172
AC

215
141
80

osc

235
157
90

255
173
AD

SS2

216
142
BE

,'36
158
9E

256
174
AE

SS3

217
143
BF

APC

237
159
9F

257
175
AF

273
1B7
BB

,
A

1/4

274
lBB
BC

275
1B9
BD

276
190
BE

277
191
BF

••

314
204

cc
315
205
CD

334
220
DC

••
y

335
221
DD

336
222
DE

337
223
OF

I_
GR CODES
r - c 1 C O D E s - - - - - - - - ( D E C SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS)

3-3

..e

••
u

316
206
CE
317
207
CF

333
219
DB

,
A
I

..
I

353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED

'u
,

..
..

356
23B
EE
357
239
EF

GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
3.1

GRAPHIC CHARACTERS

When receiving GL or GR graphic character codes from
an
application, the Professional interprets these according to the
graphic character set mapping currently being used. The default
(DEC Multinational) mapping is ASCII graphics in GL and DEC
Supplemental Graphics in GR. The default graphic character set
mapping
is
established whenever you power up (boot) the
Professional or reset the PRO/Communications terminal emulator.
Your application can also select the default mapping by using
either a hard reset (RIS) or a soft reset (DECSTR) sequence. The
soft reset is available only in Level 2. Section 3.5.30 explains
the differences between hard and soft reset.
Your application can use control functions to map different sets
of graphic characters into GL or GR. You can map two kinds of
character sets: hard or soft. The hard character sets always
reside in memory and include:
ASCII Graphics, DEC Special
Graphics and DEC Supplemental Graphics.
For example, you can
substitute the DEC Special Graphics (VTlOO Line Drawing) Set for
the ASCII Graphics Set.
In that case, the codes formerly
assigned to the ASCII graphic characters would be mapped onto the
DEC Special Graphics characters. The DEC Special Graphics Set is
shown in Appendix A.
You can also map soft character sets, also known as Dynamically
Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS).
These sets are down-line
loaded then mapped into GL or GR. The Technical Character Set,
listed in Appendix A, is provided as a DRCS. You can also create
and load your own soft character set. Chapter 4 explains how to
do this.
Section 3.5.19 explains the method for selecting and mapping both
hard and soft character sets.
Refer to Appendix E for the more limited character set
for VT52 mode.

3.2

selection

CONTROL CHARACTERS

Tables 3-2 and 3-3 define the actions taken by the Professional
when receiving CO and Cl control characters. The response shown
is for all modes, unless stated otherwise. The Professional does
not recognize all CO or Cl characters. Those not shown in either
table are ignored (no action taken). Section 3.4 defines how the
Professional handles control codes that are invalid or not
recognized.
Table 3-2 shows that SO (0/14) and SI (0/15) are also called
3-4

LSl

CONTROL CHARACTERS
and LSO,
respectively.
SO and SI (shift out and shift in) are
the traditional ASCII names or mnemonics.
LSl and LSO
(lock
shift Gl and lock shift GO) are more precise names that are
useful when dealing with the variety of character set mappings
possible on the Professional.
This chapter uses LSl and LSO
under "Character Sets and Selection" (Section 3.5.19).
Table 3-3 shows the equivalent 7-bit-compatible code extension
for each 8-bit Cl code. The code extensions require one more
byte than the Cl codes. Chapter 1 describes when to use Cl codes
and when to use 7-bit code extensions.
The code extension
announcers described in Chapter 1 are also listed in this
chapter,
in Section 3.5.2 . This chapter documents only the Cl
codes, because this is the most efficient coding convention. You
can, however, always use the equivalent code extensions indicated
in Table 3-3.
Table 3-2
CO (ASCII) Control Characters Recognized by Professional
Mnemonic

Code

Name

Action Taken

NUL

0/0

Null

Ignored when received.

ENQ

0/5

Enquiry

No answerback message is generated.
A VT102 terminal generates an answerback message, if stored.

BEL

0/7

Bell

Generates bell tone if bell is enabled
through a P/OS Set-Up menu.

0/8

Backspace

Moves cursor to the left one character
position; if cursor is at left margin, no
action occurs.

0/9

Horizontal
tabulation

Moves cursor to next tab stop, or to
right margin if there are no more tab
stops.

0/10

Linefeed

Causes a linefeed or a new line operation.

0/11

Vertical
tabulation

Processed as LF

0/12

Form feed

Processed as LF.

0/13

Carriage return

Moves cursor to left margin on current
line.

0/14

Shift out (Lock
shift G1)

Invokes G1 character set into GL. G1 is
designated by a select-character-set
(SCS) sequence.

0/15

Shift in (Lock
shift GO)

Invoke GO character set into GL. GO is
designated by a select- character-set
sequence (SCS).

(LS1)
SI
(LSO)

3-5

CONTROL CHARACTERS
Table 3-2 (Cont.)
Mnemonic

Code

Name

Action Taken

DC1

1/1

Device Control 1

Also referred to as XON. DC1 clears
DC3 (XOFF), causing the Professional
to continue transmitting characters
(keyboard unlocks) unless KAM mode
is currently set.

DC3

1/3

Device Control 3

DC3 causes the Professional to stop
transmitting characters (keyboard becomes locked for the next and subsequent keystrokes, and no reports are
generated) until a DC1 control character is received. The exact response
varies in the terminal emulation
modes and depends on whether
XON/XOFF has been enabled or disabled through a PRO/Communications
Set Up menu (see Chapter 2). On a
VT102 terminal, receipt of DC3 causes
a buffer to store any characters typed
subsequently. The keyboard becomes
locked only if the buffer fills up before
DC3 is cleared by DC1. On a VT102
terminal the keyboard becomes
locked on a byte (versus keystroke)
boundary.

CAN

1/8

Cancel

If received during an escape or control
sequence, cancels the sequence. No
error character is displayed. On a
VT102 terminal, the error character is
displayed.

SUB

1/10

Substitute

If received during an escape or control
sequence, cancels the sequence.
Causes a reverse question mark to be
displayed. On a VT102 terminal, the error character is displayed.

ESC

1/11

Escape

Processed as escape sequence introducer.

DEL

7/15

Delete

(Not a CO character) Ignored when received

3-6

CONTROL CHARACTERS
Table 3-3
C1 Control Characters Recognized by Professional

Mnemonic

8-bit
Code

Equivalent 7-bit
Code Extension

IND

8/4

1/11
ESC

NEL

8/5

HTS

Name

Action Taken

4/4
D

Index

Moves cursor down one
line in same column. If
cursor is at bottom margin, screen performs a
scroll up.

1/11
ESC

4/5
E

Next line

Moves cursor to first position on next line. If cursor
is at bottom margin,
screen performs a scroll
up.

8/8

1/11
ESC

4/8
H

Horizontal
tab set

Sets one horizontal tab
stop at the column where
the cursor is.

8/13

1/11
ESC

4/13
M

Reverse index

Moves cursor up one line
in same column. If cursor
is at top margin, screen
performs a scroll down.

SS2

8/14

1/11
ESC

4/14
N

Single shift G2

Temporarily invokes G2
character set into GL for
the next graphic character. G2 is designated by a
select- character-set
(SGS) sequence.

SS3

8/15

1/11
ESC

4/15

Single shift G3

Temporarily invokes G3
character set into GL for
the next graphic character. G3 is designated by a
select- character-set
(SGS) sequence.

1/11
ESC

5/0
p

Device
control string

Processed as opening
delimiter of a control
string for device control
use. Any control string
introduced by DCS and
terminated by ST is ignored and is not displayed on the screen,
except for ReGIS (VT125
mode) control strings:
They are processed in
VT125 mode.

DCS

9/0

3-7

CONTROL CHARACTERS

Table 3-3 (Cont.)

Mnemonic

8-bit
Code

Equivalent 7-bit
Code Extension

CSI

9/11

1/11

5/11

ESC

[

1/11

5/12

ESC

1/11

5/13

ESC

1/11
ESC

5/14

1/11

5/15

osc

APC

9/12

9/13

9/14

9/15

ESC

Name

Action Taken

Control
sequence
introducer

Processed as control sequence introducer.

String
terminator

Processed as closing delimiter of a string opened
by DCS, OSC, PM, APC.

Operating
system
command

Processed as opening delimiter of a control string
for operating system use.
Any control string introduced by OSC and terminated by ST is ignored
and is not displayed on
the screen.

Privacy
message

Processed as opening delimiter of a control string
for privacy message use.
Any control string introduced by PM and terminated by ST is ignored
and is not displayed on
the screen.

Application
program
command

Processed as opening delimiter of a control string
for application program
use. Any control string introduced by APC and terminated by ST is ignored
and is not displayed on
the screen.

3-8

ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCE OVERVIEW

3.3

ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCE OVERVIEW

Chapter 1 introduced escape and control sequences.
defined by ANSI X3.41-1977 and X3.64-1979.

They

are

The Professional uses ANSI mode to respond to a subset of escape
and control sequences specified by ANSI. There are two types of
sequences:
ANSI-standardized and private.
ANSI-standardized
sequences have a mnemonic assigned by ANSI. Private sequences
are those not presently specified by ANSI.
However,
they are
created to comply with the extensions permitted by ANSI.
Private
sequences created by DIGITAL have a mnemonic that begins with
"DEC. II
Table 3-4 lists all ANSI-compatible sequences recognized by the
Professional.
They are grouped functionally. The table shows
which modes of operation recognize any particular sequence.
Detailed descriptions of the ANSI-compatible sequences, grouped
in the same way, are in Section 3.5.
In terminal emulation mode, VT52 mode is available by program
control as well as through an operator menu selection. When
operating in VTlOO or VT200 emulation modes, you can invoke VT52
mode from your application by using the DECANM command, listed at
the end of Table 3-4.
The
Professional
recognizes
the
DIGITAL-private ANSI-incompatible VT52 escape sequences when VT52
mode is announced in your application. Table E-1 lists all the
VT52-compatible sequences recognized by the Professional. They
are fully described in Appendix E. VT52 mode is provided on the
Professional
only for compatibility with earlier software.
Because future DIGITAL equipment may not accept ANSI-incompatible
sequences, you should use only the ANSI-compatible sequences in
all new software.
VTlOO and VT200 modes include text mode and graphics mode
(ReGIS
processing). When you operate the Professional in VTlOO mode and
VT200 mode, it processes and runs ReGIS code like a VT240
terminal, with some restrictions (see Appendix D). A ReGIS
application causes the Professional to operate in graphics mode
by sending ReGIS "control strings" to the Professional.
In 8-bit
format, ReGIS control strings are introduced by the Cl control
character DCS.
The Cl character ST is the closing delimiter of
the string. DCS is one of a general class of control string
delimiters (DCS, OSC, PM, APC, ST), which are all Cl characters.
Refer to Table 3-4 and Chapter 4 for information on control
strings
in
general, and on the particular ReGIS strings
recognized by the Professional. The PRO/ReGIS Manual has ReGIS
programming information.
Chapter 1 describes how to work with 7- and 8-bit application
environments. For a 7-bit environment, the 7-bit code extensions
3-9

ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCE OVERVIEW
you may need to use in place of 8-bit Cl characters are listed in
Table 3-3.
Some of the sequences your application sends may
cause other codes to be returned to your application.
Section
3.5 describes the DECSCL and code extension announcer sequences
you use to control the representation of returned codes (7- or
8-bit).
Section 3.4 defines how the Professional
unrecognized control function codes.

handles

invalid

and

NOTE

When forming escape
or
control
sequences,
remember that it is the code that defines a
sequence, not the graphic representation of the
characters:
characters shown in the detailed
descriptions are included for readability only
and presume the DEC Multinational Set mapping
(ASCII in GL and DEC Supplemental Graphics in
GR).

3.4

ERROR RECOVERY

Current standards do not specify the action to be performed when
the Professional receives a control function with an error.
Errors are incorrect parameters, invalid control functions, or
control characters embedded in control function sequences. The
Professional usually recovers from these errors by performing as
much of the function as possible. The specific error recovery
procedures are as follows.
•

Unrecognized control functions are usually ignored.

•

Unsupported control functions (valid control functions not
recognized by the Professional in some particular mode of
operation) are usually ignored in that mode but may produce
unexpected results.

•

If a CO control character other than ESC (1/11) is received
within a sequence, the Professional performs the function of
the control character, and continues processing the sequence.

•

If ESC is received within a sequence, the previous function
is aborted and the Professional assumes it is receiving a new
escape sequence initiated by the ESC character.

3-10

ERROR RECOVERY

If a C1 control character is received within a sequence, the
previous function is aborted and the Professional performs
the function of the control character.

If CAN (1/8) or SUB (1/10) is received within a sequence, the
sequence is aborted. SUB causes a reverse question mark
(substitute character) to be displayed, followed by the
characters in the sequence received after SUB. CAN does not
display any error character but does display the remaining
characters, like SUB.

Table 3-4
Summary of ANSI-Compatible Sequences
Used in
Name and Mnemonic
(by Functional Group)

Compatibility Level
Select Compatibility Level (DECSCL)
Code Extension Announcers .................................... .
Return C1 codes to application
Return 7-bit code extensions to application
Set-Up Characteristics and Mode Selection
Set Mode (SM) and Reset Mode (RM)
Scrolling ...................................................... .
Scroll Mode (DECSCLM)
Scrolling Region ............................................... .
Set Top Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
Origin ........................................................ .
Origin Mode (DECOM)
Cursor Positioning ............................................. .
Cursor Up (CUU)
Cursor Down (CUO)
Cursor Forward (CUF)
Cursor Backward (CUB)
Cursor Position (CUP)
Horizontal and Vertical Position (HVP)
index (IND)
Reverse Index (R!)
Next Line (NEL)
Save Cursor (DECSC)
Restore Cursor (DECRC)
Cursor Characteristics .......................................... .
Cursor Enable Mode (DECTCEM)
Columns per Line
Column Mode (DECCOLM)
Auto Wrap ........................................... .
Auto Wrap Mode (DECAWM)
Screen Background ............................................ .
Screen Mode (DECSCNM)
Linefeed/New Line ............................................ .
Linefeed/New Line Mode (LNM)
Keyboard Action ............................................... .
Keyboard Action Mode (KAM)
Auto Repeat .................................................. .
Auto Repeat Mode (DECARM)

3-11

Native
Mode

Terminal
Emulation
Modes

yes

yes*
yes*

yes

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

yes

ERROR RECOVERY

Table 3-4 (Cont.)
Used in
Name and Mnemonic
(by Functional Group)

Native
Mode

Local Echo ....................................... .
Send-Receive Mode (SRM)
Cursor Key Character Selection ..................... .
Cursor Key Mode (DECCKM)
Auxiliary Keypad Character Selection ...................... .
Keypad Numeric Mode (DECKPNM)
Keypad Application Mode (DECKPAM)
Character Sets and Selection ................................... .
Select (designate) Character Set (SGS)
Invoke Character Set
Lock Shift GO (LSO or SI)
Lock Shift G1 (LS1 or SO)
Lock Shift G1, right (LS1R)
Lock Shift G2 (LS2)
Lock Shift G2, right (LS2R)
Lock Shift G3 (LS3)
Lock Shift G3, right (LS3R)
Single Shift G2 (SS2)
Single Shift G3 (SS3)
Character Attributes ............... .
Select Graphic Rendition (SGR)
Select Character Attributes (DECSCA)
Line Attributes .................... .
Double-height Line (DECDHL)
Single-width Line (DECSWL)
Double-width Line (DECDWL)
Tab Stops .................................................... .
Horizontal Tab Set (HTS)
Tabulation Clear (TBC)
Erasing ....................................................... .
Erase Character (ECH)
Erase in Line (EL)
Erase in Display (ED)
Selective Erase in Line (DECSEL)
Selective Erase in Display (DECSED)
~m~

....................................................... .

Insert Character (!CH)
Delete Character (OCH)
Insert Line (IL)
Delete Line (DL)
Inserting and Replacing Characters .............................. .
Insertion-Replacement Mode (!RM)

3-12

Terminal
Emulation
Modes

yes
yes

yes

yes
yes

yes

yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*

yes
yes*

yes
yes
yes

yes
yes

yes*
yes
yes
yes*
yes*

yes*
yes
yes
yes

yes

ERROR RECOVERY

Table 3-4 (Cont.)

Used in
Name and Mnemonic
(by Functional Group)
Printing ....................................................... .
Media Copy (MC)
Printer Extent ................................................. .
Printer Extent Mode (DECPEX)
Print Termination Character. .................................... .
Printer Form Feed Mode (DECPFF)
Print Screen (Text or Graphics Mode) ........................... .
Hardcopy (DECHCP)
Reports ....................................................... .
Device Status Report (DSR)
Cursor Position Report (CPR)
Device Attributes Primary (DA)
Device Attributes Secondary (DA2)
Identify Terminal (DECIO)
Reset ............................................. ···· .. ······
Reset to Initial State (RIS)
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR)
Interlace ...................................................... .
Interlace Mode (DECINLM)
Tests and Adjustments ......................................... .
Screen Alignment Display (DECALN)
Device Control Strings (DCS)
ReGIS Graphics Mode
Sixel Graphics Mode
Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS)
User Definable Keys (UDK's)
Other Control Strings .......................................... .
Operating System Commands (OSC)
Privacy Message (PM)
Application Program Command (APC)
ANSl/VT52 Compatibility ....................................... .
ANSl/VT52 Mode (DECANM)
* These sequences are available only in Level 2.
** These sequences are recognized but ignored.

3-13

Native
Mode

Terminal
Emulation
Modes

yes

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

yes
yes*

yes

yes
yes

no
yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*

yes*

yes**
yes**
yes**

yes**
yes**
yes
yes

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

ANSI-compatible sequences meet ANSI standards X3.64-1979 and
X3.41-1974.
This section describes the ANSI control functions
recognized by the Professional in native mode, and in VT100 and
VT200 terminal emulation modes.
The sequences described in this section have defaults that occur
when you use perform a hard reset (RIS) or soft reset (DECSTR).
The following tables list the defaults.
•

Table 3-14 lists the hard reset defaults for native mode when
you power-up or use a RIS.

•

Table 3-15 lists the hard reset defaults for terminal
emulation mode when you enter terminal emulation, use a RIS,
or a RECALL.

•

Table 3-16 lists the soft reset defaults for both native and
terminal emulation modes when you use a soft reset (DECSTR).
Resetting the emulator always performs a soft reset.

No P/OS default states (such as resetting
are described in this section.

3.5.1

between

applications)

Select Compatibility Level - DECSCL

You use the Select Compatibility Level sequence to select the
compatibility level of the Professional, Level 1 or Level 2.
In
native mode, the Professional operates at Level 2 by default.
Using the DECSCL sequence, you can set your Professional to Level
1. In terminal emulation mode, you can choose to set the
Professional to Level 1 (VT100 mode, always 7-bit controls) or
Level 2 (VT200 mode, either 7- or 8-bit controls).
You can
choose the level through a PRO/Communications menu or with the
DECSCL sequence.
Level 2 is required to process some sequences
and control strings. These are noted throughout the manual.
Table 3-5 lists the differences between Level 1 and Level 2
functions.
Differences between native and emulation modes are
noted where appropriate.

3-14

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Table 3-5
Comparison of Level 1 and Level 2
Differences

Level 1

Level 2

Special function keys and six editing keys generate
escape sequences.

Special function keys and six editing keys are
inoperative (except that F11, F12, and F13 transmit
ESC, BS, and LF, respectively)

Special function keys and six editing keys generate
escape sequences.

Eighth bit of all received characters is significant

Eighth bit of all characters is set to zero

Eighth bit of all received characters is significant

Character
Sets

ASCII and Special Graphics only

DEC Multinational, Specidl Graphics and
Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets

C1 Control
Characters

All transmitted C1 controls are forced to S7C1 state
and transmitted as 7-bit escape sequences

All C1 controls are transmitted as 8-bit controls

Keyboard
native
emulation

7 or 8 bits
native
emulation

Besides selecting the compatibility level and Cl control state,
DECSCL also performs a soft reset (see Section 3.5.30). This
puts the terminal in a known state. For this reason, using a
DECSCL is preferable to using the Code Extension Announcers
described in the next section.
The following sequences set the compatibility level.
Level 1

9/11
CSI

3/6
6

3/1

2/2

7/0

Sets terminal for Level 1 compatibility.
Level 2, B-bit Controls

9/11
CSI

3/6
6

3/2
2

2/2

7/0

Sets terminal for Level
parameter is listed for
controls.

2 compatibility by default as no
controls.
Current default is 8-bit

3-15

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Level 2, 8-bit Controls

9/11

3/6

3/2

CSI

3/11 3/0
0

2/2
II

7/0
p

Sets terminal for Level 2 compatibility by explicitly listing the
default parameter 0. Current default is 8-bit controls.
Level 2, 7-bit Controls

9/11
CSI

3/6
6

3/2
2

3;11

3/1

~2/2

110

Sets terminal for Level 2 compatibility by explicitly listing
the parameter for 7-bit controls.

Level 2, 8-bit Controls

9/11

3/6

3/2

CSI

3/11

3/2

2/2

7/0

Sets terminal for Level 2 compatibility by explicitly listing
the parameter for 8-bit controls.

3-16

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.2

Code Extension Announcers

Although not the preferred method, you can use code extension
announcers in your application to control the representation of
8-bit (Cl) control codes returned to the application by the
Professional.
However,
you can only use these announcers when
you are in Level 2 mode. When in VT100 or VT 52 emulation modes,
these sequences are ignored.
(See Chapter 1 for more information
on working with 7- and 8-bit environments).
Return 8-bit (Cl) Control Codes to Application
1/11 2/0 4/6
ESC SP
G

Lets the Terminal Subsystem return Cl control codes to the
application without converting them to their equivalent 7-bit
code extensions.
Return 7-Bit Code Extensions to Application
1/11 2/0 4/7
ESC SP
F

Causes the Terminal Subsystem to convert all 8-bit
(Cl)
control
codes to their equivalent 7-bit code extensions before returning
them to the application.

3.5.3

Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection

The Professional has two groups of setup menus
(P/OS and
PRO/Communications)
that the operator uses to manually change
certain default operating characteristics.

3-17

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Some operations, like keyclick (on/off/volume),
are controlled
only by the P/OS Terminal Setup Menu.
Some, like cursor key
mode, are controlled only by a PRO/Communications setup menu.
Still others,
like columns per line, are controlled by either
P/OS or PRO/Communications setup menus.
When both P/OS and
PRO/Communications
setup
menus
control an operation,
the
PRO/Communications setup default takes precedence.
Use of the setup menus is documented in the Hard Disk System
User's Guide for P/OS menus, and the PRO/Communications User's
Guide for PRO/Communications menus.
In your application, you can use "mode selection sequences''
to
change some of these P/OS and PRO/Communications characteristics.
The sequences cause the Professional to operate in one of two
possible ways (for example, normal/reverse screen background).
Table 3-6 lists the Professional operating
characteristics
controllable either through a setup menu or through a mode
selection
sequence
(not
all
PRO/Communications
setup
characteristics are listed, only those discussed in this manual).
You can control some characteristics through both a
menu
selection and a mode selection sequence.
In that case, the menu
selection is the default setting.
The Professional uses the
selected mode until you change it, either manually through a
setup menu or through your application.
Table 3-6 shows that two modes are changed by means of dedicated
sequences
(set/clear tabs,
select auxiliary keypad mode). All
the other modes, however,
are based on two general-purpose
sequences:
set mode
(SM)
and reset mode
(RM). These have
variable parameters so you can apply them to different functions.
The general formats of SM and RM are shown below.
SM -

Set Mode

9/11
CSI

3/11

6/8

Sets one or more modes specified by selective parameters (Ps)
the parameter string.

3-18

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
RM

Reset Mode

9/11
CS!

3/11

3/11
Ps

6/12
1

Resets one or more modes specified by selective
in the parameter string.

parameters

{PS)

You can set and reset one or more modes in one sequence. Ps is a
variable, ASCII coded, numeric parameter associated with a
particular mode. When you set or reset more than one mode in the
same sequence, you must separate the parameters with a semicolon
code (3/11). You can set or reset up to 16 modes in one
sequence. Additional parameters are ignored. Each parameter may
have a value in the range of zero (0) to 65535. Any value over
this range is treated as the maximum value. Also, within the
context of a particular command, values which exceed the maximum
values for the command (for example 24 or 80) are treated as the
contextual maximum.
Tables 3-7 and 3-8 list the modes affected by SM and RM, along
with the parameter values (decimal and column/row format).
Table
3-7 lists the ANSI-standardized modes.
Table 3-8 lists the
DEC-private modes. When you specify private sequences, the first
character in the first parameter string must be a question mark
code (3/15).
Then all parameters in the sequence will be
interpreted as DEC-private parameters. Because standardized and
private sequences are interpreted differently, when setting
several modes within a single sequence, you must choose them to
be either all standardized modes or all private modes.
The following example shows the use of the question mark (used
with DEC-private sequences) and semicolon (used with multiple
parameters). This sequence sets both column and scroll modes.
9/11 3/15 3/3 3/11 3/3 6/8
CS!
?
3
4
h
Each of the modes listed in Tables 3-7 and 3-8 is described in
detail in the rest of this chapter (all sequences are grouped
functionally as listed in Table 3-4).

3-19

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Table 3-6
Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection Sequences

Set Default Value from
Setup Characteristic
or Programmable Mode

Change from
Application

P/OS Setup
Menus

PRO /Communications
Setup Menus

Autorepeat on/off

Yes (DECARM)

Yes

Bell on/off

Yes

Current keyboard

Yes

Office/DP keyboard mode

Yes

Columns per line 80/132

Yes

Yes (DECCOLM)

Keyclick on/off

Yes

Shift lock/Caps lock

Yes

Monitor monochrome/color

Yes

Scroll jump/smooth

Yes (DECSCLM)

Yes

Settabs 1

Yes (HTS/TBC)

Yes

Video normal/reverse

Yes (DECSCNM)

Yes

Cursor block/underline

Yes

Margin bell on/off

Yes

Printer LA 1OO/LA50/LQP02

Yes

Origin mode

Yes(DECOM)

Yes

Cursor enable mode

Yes (DECCEM)

Yes

Auto wrap mode

Yes (DECAWM)

Yes

Linefeed/new line mode

Yes (LNM)

Yes

Keyboard action mode

Yes(KAM)

Yes

Send-receive mode2
(local echo)

Yes(SRM)

Yes

1. These modes are changed using dedicated sequences, not the set mode (SM) and reset mode (RM)
sequences. See Tab Stops, and Auxiliary Keypad Character Selection for more information.
2. Send-receive mode is used only in terminal emulation modes.
3.

Resetting the terminal emulator invokes the reset-to-intitial-state (RIS) sequence (see note below).

Note: The reset-to-initial-state (RIS) sequence resets programmable modes and keyboard states
to default values. If a Set-Up menu also controls that mode, the menu selection determines the default value. Refer to Table 3-14for a list of the default states selected by the RIS sequence.

3-20

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Table

3-6 (Cont.)
Set Default Value from
PRO/ Communications
Setup Menus

Setup Characteristic
or Programmable Mode

Change from
Application

Cursor key mode

Yes (DECCKM)

Yes

Auxiliary keypad mode 1

Yes (DECKPAM/
DECKPNM)

Yes

Insertion-replacement mode

Yes(IRM)

Print termination character

Yes (DECPFF)

Yes

Printer extent mode

Yes (DECPEX)

Yes

Interlace mode

Yes (DECINLM)

P/OS Setup
Menus

Yes

Reset terminal emulator3

Yes

Note: The reset-to-initial-state (RIS) sequence resets programmable modes and keyboard states
to default values. If a Set-Up menu also controls that mode, the menu selection determines the default value. Refer to Table 3-14 for a list of the default states selected by the RIS sequence.

NOTE
The
soft
terminal
reset
sequence
resets
programmable modes and keyboard states to default
values. Many default values are selectable using
PRO/Communications setup menus. Refer to Table
3-16 for a list of the default states selected by
the DECSTR sequence, in terminal emulation mode.
Table 3-7
ANSI-Standardized Modes

Name

Mnemonic

Error (ignored)

Parameter (Ps)

(3/0)

Keyboard Action

KAM

(3/2)

Insertion-replacement

IRM

(3/4)

Send-receive

SRM

(3/1 3/2)

Linefeed/New Line

LNM

(3/2 3/0)

3-21

ANSI .,COMPATIBLE

Table 3-8
ANSI-Compatible DEC Private Modes

Name

Mnemonic

Parameter (Ps)

Error (ignored)

(3/0)

Cursor Key

DECCKM

Column

DECCOLM

~:\

(3/3)

Scroll

DECSCLM

(3/4)

Screen

DECSCNM

(3/5)

Origin

DE COM

(3/6)

Auto Wrap

DECAWM

(3/l)

Auto Repeat

DECARM

(3/8)

Interlace

DECINLM

(3/9)

Printer Form Feed

DECPFF

(3/1 3/8)

Printer Extent

DECPEX

{3/1 3/9)

Cursor Enable

DECTCEM

(3/2 3/5)

(3/1)

3-22

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.4

Scrolling

Scrolling is the upward or downward movement of existing lines on
the screen.
This makes room for more display lines at either the
top or bottom of the scrolling region.
There are two methods of
scrolling,
jump scroll and smooth scroll.
Select the type of
scrolling by using the following sequences.
On the Professional, smooth scroll is possible only for
the
entire screen.
Smooth split-screen scroll is not possible, in
which case the Professional uses jump split-screen
scroll
instead.
Full-screen scroll affects all bitmap planes when the
extended bitmap option is being used.
Split-screen scroll
affects only the plane that is used for text mode.
No other
video activity occurs while scrolling is in progress.
This
includes blinking of the cursor or other characters.

DECSCLM

Scrolling Mode
9/11 3/15 3/4 6/8
CSI
?
4
h

Set selects smooth scroll.
Smooth scroll lets the
add no more than 6 lines per second to the screen.

Professional

9/11 3/15 3/4 6/12
CSI
?
4
1
Reset selects jump scroll.
Jump scroll lets the Professional add
lines to the screen as fast as possible.

3.5.5

Scrolling Region

The scrolling region is the area of the screen between the top
and bottom margins.
The margins determine which screen lines
move during scrolling.
Characters added outside the scrolling
region do not cause the screen to scroll.
The minimum size of
the scrolling region is two lines.
Therefore, the line number of
the bottom margin must be greater than the line number of the top
margin. Origin mode affects the line numbers.
After the margins are selected, the cursor moves to the home
position. Origin mode affects the home position.
Select the top
and bottom margins of the scrolling region by using the following
sequence.

3-23

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Set Top and Bottom Margins

DECSTBM

9/11
CSI

3/11
Pt

7/2
r

Selects top and bottom margins, defining the scrolling region.
Pt is the
(ASCII coded)
line number of the first line in the
scrolling region.
Pb is the line number of the bottom line.
If
either Pt or Pb is not selected, they default to top and bottom
respectively. Lines are counted from "1". If either Pt or Pb is
invalid (Pt > 23, Pt greater than or equal to Pb, or Pb> 24),
the entire sequence is ignored.

3.5.6

Origin

Origin mode determines line numbering and whether the cursor can
move outside the scrolling region (the area between the top and
bottom margins).
Lines on the screen are numbered according to the location of the
home position.
Home position is always line 1, column 1. The
cursor moves to the new home position whenever origin mode is
selected. Select origin mode by using the following sequences.
DE COM

Origin Mode

9/11 3/15 3/6 6/8
CSI
?
6
h
Set selects the home position in the scrolling region.
Line
numbers start at the top margin of the scrolling region (relative
line numbers). The cursor cannot move out of the scrolling
region.

9/11 3/15 3/6 6/12
CSI
?
6
1
Reset selects home position in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
Line numbers are independent of the scrolling region
(absolute line numbers). Use the CUP and HVP sequences to move
the cursor out of the scrolling region.

3-24

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5. 7

Cursor Positioning

The cursor indicates the active screen position where the next
character will appear. A number of operations implicitly affect
cursor positioning.
In addition, your application can control
cursor movement by means of the following sequences.

NOTE
Pn is a variable, ASCII coded, numeric parameter.
If you select no parameter or a parameter value
of 0,
the Professional assumes the parameter
equals 1.
CUU

Cursor Up

9/11
CSI

4/1
Pn

Moves the cursor up Pn lines in
stops at the top margin.

same

column.

The

cursor

Moves the cursor down Pn lines in the same
stops at the bottom margin.

column.

The

cursor

CUD

Cursor Down

9/11
CSI

CUF

the

4/2
B

Cursor Forward

9/11
CSI

4/3
Pn

Moves the cursor right Pn columns.
margin.
CUB

The cursor stops at the right

Cursor Backward

9/11
CSI

4/4
Pn

Moves the cursor left Pn columns.
margin.

3-25

The cursor stops at

the

left

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

CUP

Cursor Position

9/11
CSI

3/11
Pl

4/8
Pc

Moves the cursor to line Pl, column Pc.
The numbering of the
lines and columns depends on the state (set/reset) of origin mode
(DE COM).

NOTE
CUP and HVP perform the same function.
The
preferred method is CUP.
HVP is provided only
for compatibility with existing software.

CUP

Cursor Position (Home)

9/11 4/8
CSI

Moves the cursor to the home position, selected
( DECOM).

HVP

origin

mode

Horizontal and Vertical Position

9/11
CSI

3/11
Pl

6/6
Pc

Moves the cursor to line Pl, column Pc.
The numbering of the
lines and columns depends on the state (set/reset) of origin mode
(DECOM).

NOTE
HVP operates the same as the cursor postion (CUP)
sequence.

HVP

Horizontal and Vertical Position (Home)

9/11 6/6
CSI

The cursor moves to the home position
(DECOM).

3-26

selected

origin

mode

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
IND

Index

IND is an 8-bit control character (8/4).
It can also
expressed as an escape sequence for a 7-bit environment:

1/11 4/4
ESC
D
Moves the cursor down one line in the same column.
If the cursor
is at the bottom margin, the screen performs a scroll-up.
RI

Reverse Index

RI is an 8-bit control character (8/13).
It can also
expressed as an escape sequence for a 7-bit environment:

1/11 4/13
ESC
M
Moves the cursor up one line in the same column.
If the
is at the top margin, the screen performs a scroll-down.
NEL
Next Line

cursor

NEL is an 8-bit control character (8/5).
It can also
expressed as an escape sequence for a 7-bit environment:

1/11 4/5
ESC
E
Moves the cursor to the first position on the next line.
If~ the
cursor is at the bottom margin, the screen performs a scroll-up.
DECSC

Save Cursor

1/11 3/7
ESC
7
Saves the
attribute
Cursor.

cursor position, origin mode selection,
character
{graphic rendition), and character set.
See Restore

3-27

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Restore Cursor

DECRC

1/11 3/8
ESC
8
Restore the cursor position, character
attribute
(graphic
rendition), character set, and origin mode selections saved since
the last time the Professional was powered up (booted), or the
terminal emulator was reset, or a reset-to-initial-state (RIS)
sequence was issued.
If none of these characteristics were
saved, the following actions occur:
•

The cursor moves to home position.

•

Origin mode is reset (absolute line numbers, independent of
scrolling region).

•

No character attributes are assigned.

•

The default character set mapping is established: ASCII in
GO, DEC Special Graphics in Gl, DEC Supplemental Graphics in
G2, ASCII in G3, GO mapped to GL, G2 mapped to GR.

3.5.8

Cursor characteristics

This sequence affects the cursor in both text mode and graphics
mode.
A graphics-mode pixel-oriented cursor
(for example, a
cross hair) appears on the screen if the most recent data sent to
the
Professional
was
in
graphics
mode.
A
text-mode
character-cell-oriented cursor appears otherwise.
DECTCEM

Cursor Enable Mode

9/11 3/15 3/2 3/5 6/8
CSI
?
2
5
h
Set causes the cursor to appear.
9/11 3/15 3/2 3/5 6/12
CSI
?
2
5
1
Reset causes the cursor to disappear.

3-28

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.9

Tab Stops

You select tab stop positions on the horizontal lines of the
screen. The cursor advances (tabs) to the next tab stop when the
Professional receives a horizontal tab code (HT, 0/9).
If there
is no next tab, HT moves the cursor to the right margin.
Set and
clear the tab stops by using the following sequences.

HTS

Horizontal Tab Set

HTS is an 8-bit control character (8/8).
You can also express it
as an escape sequence when coding for a 7-bit environment:
1/11 4/8
ESC
H
Sets a horizontal tab stop at cursor position.

TBC

Tabulation Clear
9/11 6/7
CSI
g

9/11 3/0 6/7
CSI
0
g

Clears a horizontal tab stop at cursor position.
9/11 3/3 6/7
CSI
3
g
Clears all horizontal tab stops.

3.5.10

Columns per Line

Column mode selects the number of columns in each display line,
80 or 132.
With either selection, the screen can display 24
lines. Select the number of columns per line by using the
following sequences.

3-29

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
DECCOLM

Column Mode

9/11 3/15 3/3 6/8
h
CSI
?
3
Set selects 132 columns per line.
9/11 3/15 3/3 6/12
CSI
?
1
3
Reset selects 80 columns per line.

NOTE
When you change the number of columns per line,
the screen is erased and the cursor moves to the
home position.
This also sets the scrolling
region for full screen (24 lines).

3.5.11

Auto-Wrap

Auto-wrap mode selects where a received character will appear
when the cursor is at the right margin. Select auto-wrap by
using the following sequences.
DECAWM

Auto-Wrap Mode

9/11 3/15 3/7 6/8
CSI
?
7
h
Set selects auto-wrap. Any display characters received when
cursor is at the right margin appear on the next line.
display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom of
scrolling region.

the
The
the

9/11 3/15 3/7 6/12
CSI
?
7
1
Reset turns auto-wrap off. Display characters received when the
cursor is at the right margin replace the previously displayed
character.

3-30

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

NOTE
Regardless of the auto-wrap setup selection,
the
tab character never moves the cursor to the next
line.

3.5.12

Screen Background

Screen mode selects either
background on the screen.
following sequences.

DECSCNM

light (reverse)
or dark display
Select screen mode by using the

Screen Mode
9/11 3/15 3/5 6/8
CSI
?
5
h

Set selects reverse screen, a light screen background
characters.

with

dark

Reset selects normal screen, a dark screen background with
characters.

light

9/11 3/15 3/5 6/12
CS I
?
5
1

3.5.13

Linefeed/Newline

Linefeed/newline
mode
selects
the
control
character(s)
transmitted to the application by the <RETURN> and <ENTER> keys.
<ENTER> transmits the same code as <RETURN> only when the
auxiliary keypad is in keypad numeric mode (DECKPNM).
Linefeed/newline also selects
the
action
taken
by
the
Professional when receiving linefeed
(LF), form feed (FF), or
vertical tab (VT) codes. These three codes are always processed
identically.
Table 3-9 provides a summary of the code processing.
You set and reset linefeed/new line mode by using the following
sequences.
In the terminal emulation modes, you can also
manually set and reset linefeed/new line mode
through
a
PRO/Communications setup menu.

3-31

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

LNM

Linefeed/Newline Mode

9/11 3/2 3/0 6/8
CSI
2
0
h
Set causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to
the first column of the next line.
<RETURN> transmits both a CR
and a LF code. This selection is also called "new llne option."
9/11 3/2 3/0 6/12
CSI
2
0
1
Reset causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to
the next line in the current column.
<RETURN> transmits a CR
code only.

Table 3-9
Linefeed/New Line Mode Characteristics
Mode
Setting

Key
Pressed

Codes Generated

Reset

Return/Enter

(0/13)

Reset

LF*

(0/10)

Set

Return/Enter

CR LF

(0/13 0/10)

Set

LF*

(0/10)

Mode
Setting

Code Received
From Application

Action Taken

Reset

Cursor moves to left margin of current line

Reset

LF, FF, or VT

Cursor moves to next line but stays
in same column

Set

Cursor moves to left margin of current line

Set

LF, FF, or VT

Cursor moves to left margin of next
line

•There is no LINE FEED key on the Professional. The LF code (0/10) is generated as follows. IJ:J
VT100 and VT52 modes, press the top-row function key F13 (LF). In native and VT200 modes,
press CTRL/J.

3-32

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
3.5.14

Keyboard Action

Keyboard action mode lets your application lock and unlock the
keyboard.
When the keyboard is locked, no codes can be
transmitted from the keyboard to the application (and/or to the
host system in the terminal emulation modes). To alert the user,
whenever the keyboard is locked, the Wait indicator at the top of
the keyboard is turned on and the keyclick feature is disabled.
You should refer to Chapter 2 for complete details on locking and
unlocking the keyboard, because the control characters DC3 and
DCl are also used to suppress and re-enable the transmission of
data.
Select keyboard action mode by using the following
sequences.
KAM

Keyboard Action Mode

9/11 3/2 6/8

CSI

Set locks the keyboard for the next and subsequent keystrokes.
9/11 3/2 6/12

CSI

Reset unlocks the keyboard, unless it is currently locked by DC3.

3.5.15

Autorepeat

Autorepeat mode selects automatic key repeating. A key pressed
for more than 0.5 second automatically repeats the transmission
of the character (more than 0.3 second for Delete and cursor
control keys).
All keys except the top row function keys, 6
editing keys, and the <RETURN> key autorepeat. Select autorepeat
mode by using the following sequences.
Autorepeat Mode

DECARM

9/11 3/15 3/8 6/8

CSI

Set selects autorepeat. A key pressed
second automatically repeats.

for

than

one-half

9/11 3/15 3/8 6/12

CSI

Reset turns off autdrepeat.

Keys do not automatically repeat.
3-33

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.16

Local Echo (Keyboard Send-Receive)

Send-receive mode, available only in the terminal emulation
modes,
turns local echo on or off. When send-receive mode is
reset (local echo on), every character transmitted by the
Terminal
Subsystem
automatically
appears
on the screen.
Therefore, the host terminal driver or application does not have
to transmit (echo)
the character back to the Professional for
display. When send-receive mode is set (local echo off),
the
Terminal Subsystem transmits characters only to the application.
The host terminal driver or application must echo the characters
back to the Professional for display.
You set and reset send-receive mode by using the following
sequences. You can also manually set and reset send-receive mode
through a PRO/Communications setup menu.
SRM

Send-Receive Mode

9/11 3/1 3/2 6/8
CSI
1
2
h
Set turns off (disables)
local echo.
When the Professional
transmits characters to the host application, the host must echo
characters back to the Professional for display on the screen.
9/11 3/1 3/2 6/12
CSI
1
2
1
Reset selects (enables) local echo.
Characters transmitted
the application automatically appear on the screen.

3.5.17

Cursor Key Character Selection

The characters generated by the cursor keys on the editing keypad
depend on the state of cursor-key mode. The cursor key mode
selects the set of codes generated by the cursor keys.
See Table
3-10 for the codes generated by the cursor keys.
Select cursor
key mode by using the following sequences.

3-34

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

DECCKM

Cursor Key Mode
9/11 3/15 3/1 6/8
CSI
?
1
h

Set causes the cursor keys to generate control functions.
9/11 3/15 3/1 6/12
CSI
?
1
1
Reset causes the cursor keys
sequences.

generate

ANSI

cursor

control

Table 3-10
Codes Generated by Cursor Control Keys (ANSI mode)

Key

3.5.18

Cursor Key Mode
Reset (Cursor Control)

Cursor Key Mode
Set (Control Functions)

9/11
CSI

4/1
A

8/15
SS3

4/1
A

9/11
CSI

4/2
B

8/15
SS3

4/2
B

9/11
CSI

4/3

8/15
SS3

9/11
CSI

4/4
D

8/15
SS3

4/4
D

4/3

Auxiliary Keypad Character Selection

The keys on the auxiliary keypad, at the right of the keyboard,
generate either numeric characters or control
(application)
functions.
Selecting keypad numeric mode
(DECKPNM)
or keypad
application mode
(DECKPAM)
determines the type of characters.
The program function (PF) keys transmit the same characters to
the application regardless of the keypad character selection.
See Table 3-11 for the character codes generated by the auxiliary
keypad keys.
Select the auxiliary keypad mode by using the
following sequences.

3-35

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

DECKPAM

Keypad Application Mode

1/11 3/13
ESC

Selects keypad application
generate control functions.
DECKPNM

mode.

The

auxiliary

keypad

keys

Keypad Numeric Mode

1/11 3/14
ESC
>

Selects keypad numeric mode.
The auxiliary keypad generates
characters that match the numeric, comma, period, and minus sign
keys on the main keyboard.

3-36

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Table 3-11
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys (ANSI Mode)

Key

Keypad Numeric Mode

Keypad Application Mode

3/0
0

8/15
SS3

7/0
p

3/1
1

8/15
SS3

3/2
2

8/15
SS3

7/2

3/3
3

8/15
SS3

7/3
s

3/4
4

8/15
SS3

3/5
5

8/15
SS3

7/5
u

3/6
6

8/15
SS3

7/6

3/7
7

8/15
SS3

7/7

3/8
8

8/15
SS3

7/8
x

3/9
9

8/15
SS3

7/9
y

2/13
- (minus)

8/15
SS3

6/13
m

2/12
, (comma)

8/15
SS3

6/12
I

2/14
. (period)

8/15
SS3

6/14
n

0/13
CR

8/15
SS3

4/13
M

Enter*
or

0/13
CR

7/1

7/4

0/10
LF

*In keypad numeric mode, ENTER generates the same codes as RETURN. You can change the code generated by RETURN with the Linefeed/New Line Mode. When reset, the Linefeed/New Line Mode causes RETURN to generate a single control character (CR). When set, the mode causes RETURN to generate two
control characters (CR,LF).

3-37

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Table

3-11 (Cont.)

Key

Keypad Numeric Code

Keypad Application Mode

8/15
SS3

5/0

8/15
SS3

5/0

PF1

8/15
SS3

5/1

8/15
SS3

5/1

PF2

8/15
SS3

5/2

8/15
SS3

5/2

PF3

PF4

8/15
SS3

5/3

8/15
SS3

5/3

*in keypad numeric mode, ENTER generates the same codes as RETURN. You can change the code generated by RETURN with the Linefeed/New Line Mode. When reset, the Linefeed/New Line Mode causes RETURN to generate a single control character (CR). When set, the mode causes RETURN to generate two
control characters (CR,LF).

3.5.19

Character Sets and Selection

Chapter 1 introduced character encoding in the Professional. The
control functions you need to select different graphic character
sets are described below.
Appendix D describes differences
between the Professional and VT100 and VT200 series terminals.
Consult this appendix if you need to develop programs compatible
with these terminals.

3-38

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
The Professional's graphic repertoire consists of
three hard graphic sets always present in memory:
e

ASCII Graphics

•

DEC Supplemental Graphics

•

DEC Special Graphics

the

following

In addition to the hard sets,
the Technical Character Set is
provided as a soft set that you can down-line load by copying the
file LB:[ZZFONT]TCS.SET.
See Chapter 1 for details.
You can
also create your own soft graphic set. Chapter 4 explains how to
do this.
Appendix A lists all hard and soft graphic sets provided with the
Professional.
Regardless of the type of graphic set, you select character
in two steps as follows:

sets

Using SCS sequences, you designate each graphic set you
plan to use to one of the Professional's four character
sets - GO, Gl, G2, G3. This makes the graphic sets
available for your program.

To actually map any one of these sets into GL or GR you
must then invoke any of GO through G3 into GL or GR by
using lock shifts (LSO, LSl, LS2, LS3, LSlR, LS2R, LS3R)
or single shifts (SS2, SS3).

Figure 3-1 illustrates the two step process
invoking character sets.

3-39

designating

and

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

--~
GR

I
I

'INVOKING'
SEQUENCES
(LOCKSHIFT &
SINGLE SHIFT I

'DESIGNATING'
SEQUENCES

l
Figure 3-1:

GRAPHIC
REPERTORY

MA-0279A-82

Character Set Selection

3-40

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Character sets remain designated until the Professional receives
another SCS sequence.
All lock shifts remain active until the
Professional receives another lock shift or single shift.
All
single shifts remain active for only the next single graphic
character.
You do not need to select character sets in this manner every
time you use the Professional, because there is a default (DEC
Multinational) mapping:
ASCII
Graphics
in
GL
and
DEC
Supplemental Graphics in GR. The default graphic character set
mapping is reset whenever you power up (boot) the Professional or
reset the PRO/Communications terminal emulator. Your application
can also set the default mapping by means of the soft reset
(DECSTR) or hard reset (RIS) sequences.
(This is a good general
practice, because you should not rely on default states).
Under
these conditions the Professional's graphic character sets are
designated and invoked automatically as follows:
Designate

and invoke

into

ASCII Graphics
DEC Special Graphics
DEC Suppl. Graphics

GO
Gl
G2

There is no default designation of G3 (unspecified).
The default designation of DEC Special Graphics in Gl lets you
switch from ASCII Graphics to DEC Special Graphics in GL by using
LSl (SO) and LSO (SI). LSl invokes Gl
{DEC Special Graphics)
into GL, and LSO invokes GO (ASCII Graphics) into GL.

NOTE
Certain character
set
selections,
although
feasible
on
the
Professional,
may
cause
incompatibility with DEC software.
To avoid
potential problems, do not invoke GO or Gl into
GR, and do not invoke G2 or G3 into GL.
The
specific selections to avoid are indicated in the
descriptions of how to invoke character sets.

3-41

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Designating Character Sets with SCS

Table 3-12 lists the escape sequences for designating graphic
sets into the Professional's character sets. Note that many of
the sequences work only in Level 2.
Table 3-12
Designating Character Sets
Character Set

Escape Sequence

Designate as:

ASCII

1/11 2/8
ESC
(

4/2
B

GO -

1/11 2/9
ESC
)

4/2

1/11
ESC

DEC Supplemental

Dynamically
Redefinable
Character Set
(DRCS)

2/10 4/2
*
B

G2 (Level 2 only)

1/11 2/11
ESC
+

4/2
B

G3 (Level 2 only)

1/11
ESC

2/8
(

3/12

GO (Level 2 only)

1/11 2/9
ESC
(

3/12

1/11
ESC

DEC Special
Graphics

(default)

2/10 3/12
*

G1 (Level 2 only)

<
G2 (Level 2 only)

<
G3 (Level 2 only)

1/11 2/11
ESC
+

3/12

1/11 2/8
ESC
(

3/0
0

1/11
ESC

3/0
0

2/9
)

1/11 2/10 3/0
ESC
*
0

G2 (Level 2 only)

1/11
ESC

2/11

3/0
0

G3 (Level 2 only)

1/11
ESC

2/8
(

Dscs

1/11 2/9
ESC
)

Dscs

GO (Level 2 only)

G1 (Level 2 only)

1/11 2/10
ESC
*
Dscs

G2 (Level 2 only)

1/11 2/11
ESC +

G3 (Level 2 only)
Dscs

3-42

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
When designating soft character sets, Dscs is a variable that
defines the character set for the soft font. A Dscs can consist
of between 0 and 2 intermediates (I) and a
final
(F).
Intermediates are in the range 2/0 to 2/15. Finals are in the
range 3/0 to 7/14.
The following are some examples of Dscs values:
2/0
sp

Defines character set as unregistered soft set.
This value is the recornrnanded default value for
user defined sets.

4/0
@

4/2
B

Defines the soft character set to be ASCII.

3/14

Defines the soft character set to be the DEC
Technical Character Set.

>
2/6
&

2/5
%

4/3

Defines character set as "& % C," which is
currently an unregistered set.

Both hard and soft character sets remain designated until a new
SCS sequence is encountered. Soft sets can also be cleared by
RECALL, DEFAULT, self-test, power-up or by redefinition (DECDLD
sequence, explained in Chapter 4).

3-43

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Invoking Character Sets Using Lock Shifts

Once you have designated your character sets, you can invoke GO,
Gl, G2, or G3 into GL or GR, by using the lock shift control
f~nctions described in Table 3-13.
Once again, note some work
only in Level 2.
Table 3-13
Invoking Character Sets Using Lock Shifts

Control Function

Code/Sequence

Invokes:

LSO -

Lock Shift GO

0/15
SI

GO into GL (default)

LS1 -

Lock Shift G1

0/14

G1 into GL

LS1 R - Lock Shift
G1, Right

1/11 7/14
ESC

G1 into GR
(Level 2 only)*

LS2 -

1/11 6/14
ESC
n

G2 into GL
(Level 2 only)*

LS2R - Lock Shift
G2, Right

1/11 7/13
ESC }

G2 into GR (default)
(Level 2 only)

LS3 -

1/11 6/15
ESC 0

G3 into GL
(Level 2 only)

1/11 7/12
ESC
I

G3 into GR
(Level 2 only)

Lock Shift G2

Lock Shift G3

LS3R - Lock Shift
G3, Right

*Use of this sequence can cause software incompatibility.

Once you have invoked one of the four character sets (GO, Gl, G2,
or G3)
into GL and/or GR, it remains in effect until you issue
another lock shift.
Invoking Character Sets Using Single Shifts - Level 2 only

You can also invoke the G2 or G3 character sets for a single
graphic character at a time, by means of single shift control
functions.
The Professional returns to the previous character
set after displaying a single character.
Single shifts work only
in Level 2.

3-44

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
SS2

Single Shift G2

SS2 is an 8-bit control character (8/14). You can also express
it as an escape sequence when coding for a 7-bit environment:
1/11 4/14
ESC
N
Invoke G2 character set into GL for the next graphic character.

NOTE
To avoid software compatibility problems
use SS2.

SS3

not

Single Shift G3

SS3 is an 8-bit control character (8/15). You can also express
it as an escape sequence when coding for a 7-bit environment:
1/11 4/15
ESC
0
Invoke G3 character set into GL for the next graphic character.

3.5.20

Character Rendition and Attributes

Character rendition and attributes are display features that
affect the way a character is displayed without changing the
character.
You change character rendition by using Select
Graphic
Rendition (SGR) sequence.
You can also designate
characters to be selectively erasable or not selectively erasable
by using the Select Character attribute sequence (DECSCA). The
DECSCA sequence is available only in Level 2.

3-45

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
SGR

Select Graphic Rendition

The Professional can display the following character renditions.
These renditions change the appearance of a displayed character
without changing the character.
•

Bold (appearance of increased intensity)

•

Underline

Blink

•

Reverse video (reverses foreground and background)

•

Any combination of these renditions

You can select one or more character renditions at a time,
by
specifying
parameters.
Separate multiple parameters by a
semicolon. The following format shows how to select various
renditions.

9/11
CS!

3/11
Ps

Ps . . .

6/13
m

When you select multiple parameters (Ps), they are executed in
sequence and are cumulative.
If you want to turn off existing
renditions, then turn on new ones, give the first Ps a value of 0
and subsequent parameters the values for the desired renditions.
For example, to turn off existing renditions and turn on
underline-blink, you can use:

9/11 3/0 3/11 3/4 3/11 3/5 6/13
CS!
0
4
5
m
Select character renditions by using the SGR sequence
above with the appropriate Ps parameter(s) as follows.

described

where
Ps

Action

3/0
0

Turns off character attributes.

3/1

Selects bold (in SO-column mode only).

3/4
4

Selects underline.

3-46

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
3/5
5

Selects blink.

3/7
7

Selects reverse image

3/2 3/2
2
2

Turns off bold.

3/2 3/4
2
4

Turns off underline.

3/2 3/5
2
5

Turns off blink.

3/2 3/7
2
7

Turns off reverse video.

After you select a
rendition all characters received by the
Professional appear with that rendition.
If you move the
characters by scrolling, the rendition moves with the characters.
DECSCA - Select Character Attributes

You can select all subsequent characters to have the "selectively
erasable" or "not selectively erasable" attribute by using the
DECSCA sequence. This sequence has no effect on the renditions
selected by the SGR sequence.
(This sequence is only available
to Level 2 applications.) Characters are erased by the DECSED and
DECSEL sequences described in Section 3.5.22.

* You can have up to 100 blink fields (a field consists of
adjacent blinking character cells within a single horizontal
line). If you exceed this number, all blink fields stop blinking
until the overflow condition ceases.
Blinking character cells
continue to blink while displaying graphics.
If this is not
desired, you should erase such cells before displaying graphics.
The period for character cell blinking is 1-1/3 seconds, and the
duty cycle is 50 percent.
Normal-intensity characters are
produced.
3-47

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
The DECSCA sequence has the following format:
9/11
CS!

2/2
Ps

7/1
q

where:

3.5.21

Action

Turns all attributes off (does not apply to SGR)

Designates character as "nonerasable" by
DECSEL/DECSED.

Designates character as "erasable" by
DECSEL/DECSED.

Line Attributes

Line attributes are display features that affect a complete
display line.
The cursor selects the line affected by the
attribute. The cursor stays in the same character position when
the attribute changes, unless the attribute would move the cursor
past the right margin.
In that case, the cursor stops at the
right margin.
When you move lines on the screen by scrolling,
the attribute moves with the line.
Select line attributes by
using the following sequences.
DECDHL

Double Height Line

Top Half:

Bottom Half:

1/11 2/3 3/3
ESC
#
3

1/11 2/3 3/4
ESC
#
4

Makes the line with the cursor the top or bottom half of a
double-height, double-width line. The sequences work in pairs on
adjacent lines. The same character must be used on both lines to
form full characters.
If the line was previously single-width,
single-height, all characters to the right of center are lost.

3-48

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Single-Width Line

DECSWL

1/11 2/3 3/5
#

ESC

Makes the line with the cursor single-width, single-height.
is the line attribute for all new lines on the screen.
DECDWL

This

Double Width Line
1/11 2/3 3/6
ESC
#
6

Makes the line with the cursor double-width, single-height.
the
line
was
previously single-width, single-height,
characters to the right of center screen are lost.

If
all

NOTE

If you erase an entire line while using the erase
in display (ED) sequence, the line attribute
changes to single-height and single-width.

3.5.22

Erasing

Erasing removes characters from the screen without affecting
other characters on the screen. Erased characters are lost. The
cursor position does not change when erasing characters or lines.
If you erase an entire line while using the erase-in-display (ED)
sequence, the line attribute becomes single-height, single-width.
If you erase a line by using the erase-in-line (EL) sequence, the
line attribute is not affected. The cursor determines the line
for all EL sequences.
Erasing a character also erases any character attribute of the
character. Erase characters by using the following sequences.
ECH

Erase Character (Level 2 only)
5/8
9/11
CSI Pn X

Erases characters at the cursor position and the next n-1
character. A parameter of 0 or 1 causes a single character to be
3-49

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
erased. Character attributes are set to normal. No reformatting
of data of the line occurs, and the character remains at the same
position.
EL

Erase in Line

9/11 4/11
CSI
K

9/11 3/0 4/11
CSI
0
K

Erases from the cursor to the end of the line,
including
cursor position. Line attributes are not affected.

the

9/11 3/1 4/11
CSI
1
K

including
Erases from the beginning of the line to the cursor,
not
affected.
the cursor position. Line attributes are
9/11 3/2 4/11
2
K
CSI

Erases complete line.
ED

Erase in Display

9/11 4/10
CSI
J

9/11 3/0 4/10
CSI
0
J

Erases from the cursor to the end of the screen,
cursor
position.
Line
attributes
become
single-width for all completely erased lines.

including the
single-height,

9/11 3/1 4/10
CSI
1
J

Erases from the beginning of the screen to the cursor,
including
the cursor position.
Line attributes become single-height,
single-width for all completely erased lines.
9/11 3/2 4/10
CSI
2
J

Erases the complete display. All lines are erased and changed to
single-width. The cursor does not move.

3-50

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
DE CS EL

Selective Erase In Line (Level 2 only)

9/11
CSI

3/15

4/11

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA) from
the cursor to the end of the line.
Does not affect line
attributes or character renditions.

9/11
CSI

3/15
?

3/1
1

4/11
K

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA) from
the beginning of the line to and including the cursor position.
Does not affect line attributes or character renditions.

9/11
CSI

3/15
?

3/2
2

4/11
K

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA)
on
the
line.
Does not affect line attributes or character
attributes.
DECSED

Selective Erase in Display (Level 2 only)

9/11
CSI

3/15

4/10

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA) from
and including the cursor to the end of the screen.
Does not
affect line attributes or character renditions.

9/11
CSI

3/15
?

3/1
1

4/10
J

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA) from
the beginning of the screen to and including the cursor.
Does
not affect line attributes or character renditions.

9/11
CSI

3/15

3/2

4/10

Erases all "erasable" characters (as designated by a DECSCA)
in
the entire display. Does not affect line attributes or character
renditions.

3-51

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.23

Editing

You use editing sequences to insert or delete characters and
lines of characters at the cursor position.
The cursor position
does not change when inserting or deleting lines.
Insert or
delete characters or insert and delete lines by using the
following sequences.

NOTE
Insertion-replacement mode
(IRM)
selects
how
characters
are
added
to the screen.
See
Inserting and Replacing Characters,
in
this
chapter, for more information.
Pn is a variable,
ASCII coded, numeric parameter.
If you select no
parameter
or
a parameter value of 0,
the
Professional assumes a parameter value of 1.

ICH

Insert Character (Level 2 only)
9/11
4/0
CSI Pn @

with the
Inserts Pn blank characters at the cursor position,
character renditions set to normal.
The cursor does not move and
remains at the beginning of the inserted blank characters.
Characters shifted
Characters on the line are shifted forward.
off the right edge of the screen are lost.

DCH

Delete Character
9/11
CSI

5/0
P

Deletes Pn characters, starting with the character at the cursor
position.
When a
character is deleted, all characters to the
right of the cursor move to the left.
This creates a
space
character at the
right margin for each character deleted.
Character renditions move with the characters.
The spaces
created at the end of the line have all their character
renditions off.

Insert Line
9/11
CSI

4/12
Pn

Inserts Pn lines at the line with the cursor.
If fewer
than Pn
lines remain from the current line to the end of the scroll

3-52

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
region, the number of lines inserted is the lesser number.
Lines
within the scroll region at and below the cursor move down.
Lines moved past the bottom margin are lost. The cursor is reset
to the first column. This sequence is ignored when the cursor is
outside the scrolling region.
DL

Delete Line

9/11
CSI

4/13
M

Deletes Pn lines, starting at the line with the cursor.
If fewer
than Pn lines remain from the current line to the end of the
scroll region, the number of lines deleted is the lesser number.
As lines are deleted, lines within the scroll region and below
the cursor move up, and blank lines are added at the bottom of
the scroll region.
The cursor is reset to the first column.
This sequence is ignored when the cursor is outside the scrolling
region.

3.5.24

Inserting and Replacing Characters

The Professional displays received characters at the cursor
position.
Insertion-replacement
mode
determines
how the
Professional adds characters to the screen.
Insert mode displays
the character and moves previously displayed characters to the
right. Replace mode adds characters by replacing the character
at the cursor position.
Select insertion-replacement mode by
using the following sequences.
IRM

Insertion-Replacement Mode

9/11 3/4 6/8
CSI
4
h
Set selects insert mode. New display characters move old display
characters to the right. Characters moved past the right margin
are lost.
9/11 3/4 6/12
CSI
4
1
Reset selects replace mode. New display characters replace old
display characters at the cursor position. The old character is
erased.

3-53

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.25

Printing

The Professional has a
serial printer interface for local
printing.
Your application can select all text mode print
operations by using Media Copy (MC) sequences. They are for text
mode only and may not be used to reproduce the graphics-mode
content of the display.
A line of double-height characters print as two identical lines
of single-width characters.
Double-width characters print as
single-width characters on a single
line.
No
character
attributes are preserved.
Before selecting a print operation, check the printer status by
using the printer status report (DSR).
Do not select a print
operation if the serial printer is not ready to print.
If the
printer is unavailable or busy, the print request will still be
assumed completed.
Select print operations by using the following sequences.

Media Copy, Auto-Print Mode
9/11 3/15 3/5 6/9
CS I
?
5
i

Turns on auto-print mode. A display line prints after you move
the ~ursor off the line, using a linefeed, form feed, or vertical
tab, which is also transmitted to the printer.
The line also
prints during an auto-wrap.
Auto-wrapped lines end with a line
feed.

9/11 3/15 3/4 6/9
CSI
?
4
i
Turns off auto-print mode.

NOTE
You can also turn the auto-print mode on and off
by pressing <CTRL>/<PRINT SCREEN>.
See Section
2. 5.

NOTE
When you power up (boot) the Professional, use a
RIS
sequence,
or
reset
the emulator,
MC
auto-print mode is turned off.
In native mode,

3-54

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
RIS initializes the Terminal Subsystem only if MC
printer controller mode is off.
If MC printer
controller mode is on, RIS resets the printer,
not the Terminal Subsystem.
MC

Media Copy, Printer Controller
9/11 3/5 6/9
CSI
5
i

Turns on printer controller mode and sends CAN (1/8)
to the
printer.
The
Professional
transmits received characters,
including RIS sequences, to the printer without displaying them
on the screen.
All characters and character sequences except
NUL, CSI 5 i,
and CSI 4 i
are sent to the printer.
The
Professional does not insert or delete spaces, or provide line
delimiters, or select the correct printer character set.
This
data path is unidirectional, and therefore an application cannot
receive data from the printer while printer controller mode is
on.
On the Professional, you always
whenever the command is issued.

enter

printer

controller

mode

(0/13)

the

9/11 3/4 6/9
CSI
4
i
Turns off printer controller mode and sends a CR
printer.

NOTE
Printer controller mode sequences that are used
to turn that mode on or off are not sent to the
printer.
All other sequences are.
To turn
printer controller mode off, you must send the
above sequence exactly as indicated or
its
equivalent 7-bit format (ESC [ 4 i).

3-55

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Media Copy, Print Cursor Line
9/11 3/15 3/1 6/9
CSI
?
1
i

Prints the display line containing the cursor.
The cursor
position does not change.
The print-cursor-line sequence is
completed when the line prints.

Media Copy, Print Screen
9/11 6/9
CSI
i

9/11 3/0 6/9
CSI
0
i

Prints the screen display.
Printer extent mode (DECPEX)
selects
either the full
screen or the scrolling region to be printed.
Select
the
scrolling
region
by
using
the
set-topand-bottom-margins
(DECSTBM)
sequence.
Printer form feed mode
(DECPFF) selects either a form feed (FF) or a line feed
(LF}
as
the print termination character. The print-screen sequence is
completed when the screen prints.

3.5.26

Printer Extent

Printer extent mode selects either the full
screen or the
scrolling region to be printed during a MC print screen sequence.
It does not affect the DECHCP sequence.
Select printer extent
mode by using the following sequences.

DECPEX

Printer Extent Mode
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/9 6/8
CSI
?
1
9
h

Set causes the full screen to be printed during a print screen.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/9 6/12
CSI
?
1
9
1
Reset causes the scrolling region to be printed
screen.

3-56

during

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.27

Print Termination Character

Printer form feed mode determines which print
termination
character is transmitted after a print screen. The form feed
(FF) and line feed (LF) control characters serve as the print
termination characters.
Select printer form feed mode by using
the following sequence.
DECPFF

Printer Form Feed Mode
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/8 6/8
CSI
?
1
8
h

Set selects a form feed (FF) code as the print termination
character.
The Professional transmits this character to the
printer after each print screen.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/8 6/12
CSI
?
1
8
1

Reset selects a line feed (LF) code as the print termination
character.
On the Professional, no space is cleared between
print screens if DECPFF is reset.

3.5.28

Print Screen (Text or Graphics Mode)

You can use the DECHCP (Hard Copy) sequence to print the text
contents of the screen.
The DECPEX and DECPFF modes have no
effect on DECHCP. The entire screen is printed, without any
spacing between printouts. Pressing the <PRINT SCREEN> key has
the same effect as using the DECHCP sequence.
If the printer is
unavailable or busy when the DECHCP sequence is sent, the print
request will still be assumed completed.

NOTE
If you want to print the graphics content of
screen, press <CTRL>/<PRINT SCREEN>.
DECHCP

Hard Copy
1/11 2/3 3/7
ESC
#
7

Prints text contents of screen.

3-57

the

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.29

Reports

The Professional transmits reports in response to
program
requests.
Reports specify type and status, and cursor position.
The report requests and responses are as follows.

NOTE
The Professional does not respond to the DSR, DA,
or DECIO sequences during printer operation.
Also, no reports are transmitted if DCl is
pending (DC3 suppresses all transmission).
DSR

Device Status Report

9/11 3/5 6/14
CSI
5
n
The application requests a status report.
9/11 3/0 6/14
CSI
0
n
The Professional's response is: Ready, no malfunctions detected.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/5 6/14
CSI
?
1
5
n
The application requests a printer status report. The Professional
checks the status of the printer. This report should be requested
before any print operation.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/3 6/14
CSI
?
1
3
n
The Professional's response is: The printer is not ready and
never has been, when tested, since the last time the Professional
was booted.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/1 6/14
CSI
1
1
n
?
The printer is not ready to print.
9/11 3/15 3/1 3/0 6/14
CSI
1
n
?
0
The printer is ready to print.

3-58

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

9/11

3/15

3/2

3/5

6/14

CSI

The application asks whether User Defined Keys (UDK's) are locked
or unlocked.
(UDK's function only in VT200 emulation mode.)

9/11

3/15

3/2

3/0

6/14

CSI

User Defined Keys are unlocked.

9/11

3/15

CSI

3/2
2

3/1

6/14

User Defined Keys are locked.

CPR

Cursor Position Report

9/11 3/6 6/14
CSI

The application
Professional.

9/11
CSI

n
requests

3/11
Pl

cursor

position

report

from

the

5/2
Pc

The Professional reports the cursor's position in response to a
DSR sequence request.
Pl indicates the line number and Pc
indicates the column number.
Line numbering depends on the state
(set/reset)
of origin mode (DECOM). The leftmost column number
is "l" and topmost line number is "l".

Primary

Device Attributes

An application can query the Professional about Primary and
Secondary Device Attributes in that order.
The Primary DA
exchange is as follows:

9/11 3/0 6/3

9/11 6/3
CSI

CSI

The application requests the Professional to identify its service
class (Level 1 or Level 2) and the services it supports. The
Level 1 response is incompatible with the Level 2 response.
In
native mode,
how the Professional responds depends on the
terminal type, which must be set in the Terminal Driver with a
Set Multiple Characteristics QIO.
(See the P/OS System Reference
Manual for details.)

3-59

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

NOTE
Setting the terminal type to VT2XX is
not
necessary to use Level 2 functions.
The DECSEL
sequence selects the level of functionality.
However, if your application depends on receiving
the proper response from the terminal subsystem,
you should set the terminal type with the Set
Multiple Characteristics QIO.
In native mode, if the terminal type is anything
VT2XX, the Professional responds as follows:
9/11
CSI

3/15

3/2

3/1
1

3/11

3/11
Po

3/11
Pr

other

than

3/11
Pv

6/3
c

where
Po

indicates the hardware options
0 - No Extended Bit Option
1 - Extended Bit Option and monochrome monitor
2 - Extended Bit Option and color monitor

is reserved, currently 0

is the Terminal Subsystem revision level

is reserved, currently 0

In native mode, if the terminal type is VT2XX, and in all
terminal emulation modes, the Professional responds as follows:
9/11
CSI

3/15

3/6

3/2
2

3/11
Ps

6/3
c

where
of parameters {separated by ";")
the
Professional
what
features

is a list
describing
supports

1
2

132 column mode
printer port
ReGIS display (VTlOO and VT200 modes only)
sixel graphics (VT200 mode only)
selectively erasable characters
Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets

3
4
6
7

3-60

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
8

User Definable Keys (VT200 mode only)

DA2
Device Attributes
Secondary The Secondary Device
Attribute sequence asks the Professional to list more information
about itself as follows:

9/11
CSI

3/14

6/3
c

In native mode, the Professional responds as follows:
9/11
CSI

3/14

6/1

6/0

3/11

3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 6/3
Pv ; Po ; Ph ; Pk ; Pe ; Pg c

where
Pv

is the Terminal Subsystem revision number

lists the hardware options
0 - No Extended Bit Option
1 - Extended Bit Option and monochrome monitor

2 - Extended Bit Option and color monitor
Ph

is the video option ID

is the keyboard code revision number

is the VT200 emulation code revision number

is the GIDIS revision number

In terminal emulation mode, the Professional responds as follows:
9/11
CSI

3/14

6/1
1

6/0
0

3/11

3/11
6/3
Pv ; Po c

where
Pv

is the terminal emulator revision level

lists the hardware options
0 - No Extended Bit Option
1 - Extended Bit Option and monochrome monitor
3-61

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
2 - Extended Bit Option and color monitor
DEC ID

Identify Terminal

1/11 5/10
ESC
Z
The application requests the Professional to identify itself.
the Professional uses the device attributes (DA) sequence to
respond. This sequence is the only one recognized by both
ANSI-compatible and ANSI-incompatible (VT52) modes.
Future
DIGITAL equipment may not support DECID~ Therefore, new software
should use the device-attributes sequence format.

3.5.30

Reset

The Professional has two types of reset sequences:
(RIS) and a soft reset (DECSTR).

a hard

reset

The reset-to-initial-state
(RIS)
sequence
initializes
Terminal Subsystem to default states and clears the screen.

the

RIS - Reset to Initial State

RIS affects the text-mode states, graphics-mode states,
and
keyboard.
Except for two keyboard states (Compose mode on/off,
keyboard lock/unlock), RIS affects only the states that can be
set by an application.
RIS has no effect on states such as
printer status or cursor block/underline, that cannot be changed
from an application.
RIS operates differently, depending on whether the Professional
is in native or terminal emulation mode. Table 3-14 lists the
default states selected by the RIS sequence when the Professional
is in native mode. Table 3-15 lists the default states selected
by the RIS sequence when the Professional is in terminal
emulation mode.
Reset the Terminal Subsystem by using the following sequence.
1/11 6/3
ESC
c
Resets the Professional to its initial default states.

3-62

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
NOTE

In native mode,
the RIS sequence is invoked
whenever you power up (boot) the Professional.
Also in native mode, RIS initializes the Terminal
Subsystem only if MC printer controller mode is
off. If MC printer controller mode is on, RIS
resets the printer, not the Terminal Subsystem.
In terminal emulation mode, RIS is
invoked
whenever you enter terminal emulation or issue a
RECALL.

Table 3-14
States Selected by RIS Sequence in Native Mode
Escape or Control Sequence

State after RIS Sequence

Code extension announcer
Scroll mode (DECSCLM)
Set top/bottom margins (DECSTBM)
Origin mode (OECOM)
Cursor enable mode (DECTCEM)
Column mode (DECCOLM)
Auto wrap mode (DECAWM)
Screen Mode (DECSCNM)
Linefeed/new line mode (LNM)
Keyboard action mode (KAM)
Auto repeat mode (DECARM)
Cursor key mode (DECCKM)
Auxiliary keypad mode (OECKPAM/DECKPNM)
Character sets

Return 7-bit code extensions
Default value from P/OS Set-Up menu
Full screen
Reset (absolute line numbers)
Set (cursor blinks)
Default value from P/OS Set-Up menu
Set (autowrap on)
Default value from P/OS Set-Up menu
Reset (send CR only)
Reset (unlock keyboard)
Default value from P/OS Set-Up menu
Reset (ANSI Cursor control)
DECKPNM (numeric mode)
GO = ASCII Graphics
G1 = DEC Special Graphics
G2 = DEC Supplemental Graphics
G3 = unspecified
GO mapped to GL
G2 mapped to GR
Cleared
All graphic attributes off
Set to "not erasable"
Single-height/single-width line
Default value from P/OS Set-Up menu
Reset (replace)
Auto print off
Set (print full screen)
Set (FF is print termination char.)
Reset (interlace off)
Reset (ANSI mode)
Unlocked (if locked by KAM or DC3)
Off
Reset to ReGIS color map
Disconnected
Cleared
Cleared
Returned to upper-left corner

Down-Line-Loaded Sets
Select graphic rendition (SGR)
Selective Character Attribute (DECSCA)
Line Attributes (OECDHL/DECSWL/DECDWL)
Horizontal tab stops (HTS/TBC)
Insertion-replacement mode (IRM)
Media copy auto print mode (MC)
Printer extent mode (DECPEX)
Printer form feed mode (DECPFF)
Interlace mode (DECINLM)
ANSl/VT52 mode (DECANM)
Keyboard
Compose mode
Output map (graphics)
Communications line
User Defined Keys
Screen
Cursor position

3-63

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Table 3-15
States Selected by RIS Sequence in Terminal Emulation Mode

Escape or Control Sequence

State after RIS Sequence

Code extension announcer
Scroll mode (DECSCLM)
Set top/bottom margins (DECSTBM)
Origin mode (DECOM)
Cursor enable mode (DECTCEM)
Column mode (DECCOLM)
Auto wrap mode (DECAWM)
Screen mode (DECSCNM)
Linefeed/new line mode (LNM)
Keyboard action mode (KAM)
Auto repeat mode (DECARM)
Send-receive mode (SAM)
Cursor key mode (DECCKM)
Auxiliary keypad mode (DECKPAM/DECKPNM)
Character sets

Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Full Screen
Reset (absolute line numbers)
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Reset (unlock keyboard)
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Reset (ANSI cursor control)
DECKPNM (numeric mode)
GO = ASCII Graphics
G1 = DEC Special Graphics
G2 = DEC Supplemental Graphics
G3 = unspecified
GO = mapped to GL
G2 mapped to GR
Cleared
All graphic attributes off
Set to "not erasable"
Single-height/single-width line
Default value from PRO/Comm Sotup Menu
Reset (replace)
Auto print off
Set (print full screen)
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Reset (interlace off)
Default value from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Unlocked (if locked by KAM or DC3)
Off
Reset to ReGIS color map
Disconnected
Cleared or Loaded based on default value
from PRO/Comm Setup Menu
Exits
Cleared
Returned to upper-left corner of the screen

Down-Line-Loaded Sets
Select graphic rendition (SGR)
Selective Character Attribute (DECSCA)
Line attributes (DECDHL/DECSWL/DECDWL)
Horizontal tab stops (HTS/TBC)
Insertion-replacement mode (IRM)
Media copy auto print mode (MC)
Printer extent mode (DECPEX)
Printer form feed mode (DECPFF)
Interlace mode (DECINLM)
ANSl/VT52 mode (DECANM)
Keyboard
Compose mode
Output map (graphics)
Communications line
User Defined Keys
ReGIS
Screen
Cursor position

3-64

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
DECSTR - Soft Terminal Reset

You can invoke DECSTR (soft terminal reset) from the keyboard by
selecting "Reset" in the Setup Menu. You can invoke a soft reset
directly using the DECSTR sequence, if the Professional is in
Level 2 mode.
(When in Level 1 mode, the Professional ignores
the escape sequence.) You can also invoke a soft reset indirectly
using DECSCL, Select Compatibility Level.
Perform a soft reset by using the following sequence.

9/11
CSI

2/1

7/0
p

NOTE
The DECSTR sequence is invoked whenever you reset
the PRO/Communications terminal emulator.
The DECSTR sequence sets the Professional to the default states
listed in Table 3-16. These states are the same for native and
terminal emulation modes.

3-65

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES
Table 3-16
States Selected by DECSTR Sequence

Escape or Control Sequence

State After DECSTR Sequence

Text cursor
Insert/ replace
Origin mode
Autowrap
Keyboard action
Keypad mode
Cursor key mode
Top margin
Bottom margin
Character sets
VT100 mode

On
Replace
Absolute
Off
Unlocked
Numeric
Normal
1

24
GO = ASCII Graphics
G1 = DEC Special Graphics
GO = mapped to GL
GO = ASCII Graphics
G1 = DEC Special Graphics
G2 = DEC Supplemental Graphics
G3 = unspecified
GO mapped to GL
G2 mapped to GR
Normal
Normal (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED)

VT200 and Native modes

Video character attributes
Selective erase attributes
Save cursor state*
Cursor position
Character sets

Home
Appropriate defaults as above

Off
Normal
Normal (reset)
Power-up defaults
Default
Exits to power-up default states

Selective erase attribute bit write state
SGR write state
Origin mode
Character shift
Color map
ReGIS
*Applies only to later restore cursor commands (DECRC).

3.5.31

Interlace

To reduce
You use interlace mode for high resolution options.
screen flicker, interlace should be turned off (reset) if such an
option is not installed.
DECINLM

Interlace Mode

9/11 3/15 3/9 6/8
CSI
?
9
h

Set turns on interlace mode.
is alternately interlaced.

The raster scanning of the

9/11 3/15 3/9 6/12
CSI
?
9
l

Reset turns off interlace mode.
3-66

display

ANSI-COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

3.5.32

Tests and Adjustments

The Professional has a screen alignment pattern that service
personnel use to adjust the screen. Display the screen alignment
pattern by using the following sequence.

DE CALN

Screen Alignment Display
1/11 2/3 3/8
ESC
#
8

Fills the screen with rectangles for screen focus and alignment.
This sequence is used by DIGITAL Manufacturing and Field Service
personnel.

3.5.33

ANSl/VT52 Compatibility

When in terminal emulation, you can select VT52 mode from a
PRO/Communications
menu.
You
can
also
switch to VT52
compatibility by program control from VT100 mode or VT200 mode.
In
VT52 mode, you can use DIGITAL-private VT52-compatible
sequences.
All VT52 compatible sequences are described in
Appendix E.
Programmable and setup features and modes selected in ANSI mode
are also in effect in VT52 mode.
However, usually you cannot
change these features and modes in VT52 mode.
In ANSI mode, use the following sequence to switch to VT52 mode.
DECANM

Enter VT52 Mode
9/11 3/15 3/2 6/12
CSI
?
2
1

In ANSI mode,
reset selects VT52 mode.
In VT52 mode,
the
Professional responds like a VT100 mode terminal emulating a VT52
terminal.

NOTE
When you reset the PRO/Communications terminal
emulator,
the
Professional
is
reset
to
ANSI-compatible mode.

3-67

CHAPTER 4
RESPONSE OF PROFESSIONAL TO CONTROL STRINGS

The Professional responds to several types of control strings. A
control string is a delimited sequence of characters that occurs
in the data stream as a logical entity for control purposes.
A
control string consists of an opening delimiter, a command
string, and a closing delimiter.
The opening delimiter indicates the class of the component which
is sending or receiving the control string, for example a device
or an application program. The following Cl control characters
are used as opening delimiters:
•

DCS (9/0) - introduces a Device Control String

•

OSC (9/13) - introduces an Operating System Command

•

PM (9/14) - introduces a Privacy Message

•

APC (9/15) - introduces an Application Program Command

The closing delimiter, ST (9/12), is used for all four classes of
control strings. ST is an 8-bit control character that can also
be expressed as an escape sequence for a 7-bit environment:
1/11
ESC

5/12
\

ST terminates any control string and returns control to
application running when the control string was initiated.

4-1

the

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

4.1

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

PCS is an 8-bit control character (9/0)
that can also
expressed as an escape sequence for a 7-bit environment:
1/11
ESC

5/0
P

The Professional uses device control strings to perform
functions. The most significant functions include:

certain

•

Processing ReGIS graphics commands - VT100 and VT200
emulation modes only

•

Creating, loading, and clearing down-line loadable character
sets (DRCS) - native and VT200 emulation modes

•

Sending and receiving graphics in sixel format - VT200
emulation mode only

•

Defining, loading, and clearing User Defined Keys (UDKs) VT200 emulation mode only

4.1.1

ReGIS Graphics

You can use ReGIS graphics
emulation modes.

only

VT100

and

VT200

terminal

ReGIS, the Remote Graphics Instruction Set, consists of a set of
commands that allow you to create an image. You create an image
by describing the parts as standard geometric forms--lines,
curves, circles--with appropriate attributes.
The PRO/ReGIS
manual explains how to use ReGIS on the Professional.
When the Professional is operating in either VT100 or VT200 mode,
receipt of a ReGIS device control string, DCS Pn p, causes the
Professional to switch from text mode to graphics mode.
All
characters after the ReGIS control string introducer are passed
to the ReGIS interpreter in the Pro/Communications application
until the string terminator, ST, is received. Upon receipt of
ST, the Professional returns to text mode.

NOTE
You cannot use ReGIS graphics if the graphics
option on the PRO/Communications General Terminal
Setup Menu is disabled.
Full ReGIS functionality
4-2

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
requires the Extended Bitmap Option (EBO).
If
you do not have an EBO,
ReGIS operates in a
fallback
mode.
Both text and graphics are
written to the single plane bitmap.
This means
that text overlays graphics. Any ReGIS functions
that require multiple planes do not function
correctly.
You can enter ReGIS on two command levels, depending
parameters you specify in the Device Control String.

9/0

7/0

DCS

the

Enter ReGIS graphics mode, accepting data from the same data path
as the sequence, at the command level that was in effect at the
end of the last ReGIS control string.
(ReGIS is at the highest
command level if the Professional was powered-up after the last
device control string.)

9/0

3/1

7/0

DCS

Enter ReGIS graphics mode, accepting data from the same data path
as the sequence,
and force immediate synchronization to the
highest command level in the same way that the ";" character acts
in a ReGIS string.
The Professional also recognizes the following two control
strings,
although ReGIS commands do not display at the bottom of
the screen.

9/0

3/2

7/0

DCS

9/0

3/3

7/0

DCS

4-3

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
Upon receipt of ST, the Professional exits ReGIS graphics mode.

4.1.2

Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS)

When operating at Level 2 in both native and terminal emulation
modes, you can create and load a character set containing up to
94 characters for 80 or 132 column mode. This character set is
called a Dynamically Redefinable Character Set (DRCS).
(Such
character sets are also called down-line loadable or soft
character sets.) To create characters, you design and code them
as ASCII character strings. Once coded, you load them into the
DRCS buffer by using a DECDLD device control string.
When loaded in the DRCS buffer, you can designate the DRCS as one
of the Professional's character sets through the Character Set
Selection (SCS) sequence described in Section 3.5.19.
When you
want to actually use the character set, you invoke it using
locking and single shifts as described in Section 3.5.19.
In native mode, the Professional has four DRCS buffers.
Hence,
you can create and load up to four soft character sets.
In
terminal emulation mode, the Professional has only one buffer.
Therefore, you can only create and load one soft character set.
The DRCS buffers are located in volatile RAM. Therefore when you
power-off or use a RIS sequence, the soft character sets are
lost.

4.1.2.1 Designing a Character Set - Before you create a soft
character set, you must decide on certain parameters that control
how you design each character in the set.
You specify these
parameters when loading the character set with a DECDLD. These
parameters must remain consistent throughout your definition of
the character set. The parameters set constraints within which
you design each character. The three parameters are as follows:
•

80 or 132 column (Pw)

•

cell matrix size (Fems)

•

10 x 12 pixels (the usual choice for 80 column)

•

7 x 10 pixels (the usual choice for 132 column)

full cell or text cell (Pt)

4-4

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
The column (Pw) and cell matrix size (Pcms) are interrelated.
You can use the 10 x 12 cell only in 80 column mode. Normally,
you use the 7 x 10 cell in 132 column. When you use it in 80
column mode, much additional white space results. Your selection
of cell matrix size provides you with a grid to lay out your
character.
The final parameter, full cell or text cell (Pt), determines
which pixels within the character cell you can manipulate. Each
pixel is represented by a bit with a binary value of 1 (on) or O
(off).
You form a character pattern by selectively turning
pixels on. The remaining off pixels form the background.
In
full cell mode you can control every pixel in the cell;
therefore, you are responsible for providing intercharacter
spacing.
In text mode you cannot access certain pixels,
depending on the column mode.
The restricted areas guarantee
intercharacter spacing.
Figure 4-1 shows the pixels you can
manipulate in when using text mode. Shaded areas indicate pixels
you cannot turn on .

••••••••••••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
•000000000••
MA-1171-85

Figure 4-1:

Character Cells in Text Mode

Note that the 7 x 10 cell in 132 colum mode allows you to access
all columns. This is because the narrow width makes is difficult
to design characters. However, be sure to provide space on
either the right- or left-hand column in a consistent manner, so
your characters will not run together.

4-5

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
In full cell mode you can
however,
that characters
spacing at the edges of the
desirable when designing
Graphics drawing set.

manipulate any pixel.
Be warned,
will run together unless you provide
cell. Such running together may be
graphic sets, such as the DEC Special

The following paragraphs describe how to design a character and
code it as an ASCII character string that you can load with a
DECDLD device control string. The example creates a character
"A" for an 80 column format in a 10 x 12 text mode cell. The
process requires four steps.
1.

Decide which pixels within the cell matrix you want to turn
on to form the character pattern. Your design for the
character "A" might look like Figure 4-2.

!----

12 PIXELS

--1

00000000000

ooooeoeooooo
oooeoooeoooo
ooeoooooeooo
oeoooooooeoo
10 PIXELS

oeoeoeoeoeoo

oeoooooooeoo
oeoooooooeoo
000000000000
00000000000
MA-1112.es

Figure 4-2:

Example of an 80-Column Font Character "A"

NOTE
The reason horizontal pixels are alternately
turned on and off is a design consideration
discussed in the next section. Basically, it
is hardware specific to the Professional.

4-6

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
2.

Break the pixels of the character cell into columns of 6 bits
each,
using the format shown in Figure 4-3.
The column
numbers designate the order in which the columns will be
loaded.
Each column is now represented as a vertical 1 x 6
pixel matrix called a sixel, with the least significant bit
at the top.
Because the character height (10 pixels) is not
a multiple of 6, the columns on the bottom of the character
cell consist of only four bits each. The two highest order
bits, 5 and 6 are ignored.
You read the binary value of each
sixel from the bottom up, as shown in Figure 4-3.

123456789101112
bO 000000000000
b1

ooooeo•ooooo

ooo•oooeoooo

ooeoooooeooo

oooooooooeoo

oeoeoeoeouoo

oeoooooooeoo

oeooooooo•oo

b2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b3 000000000000
13 1 5 1 7 19 21 23
14 16 18 20 22 24

UPPER
COLUMNS

LOWER
COLUMNS

l
MA-1170-85

Figure 4-3:

Example of 80-Column Font Character "A"
into Sixels

Divided

Convert the binary value of each sixel to its equivalent
octal value and add an offset of octal 077.
The offset is
necessary because sixel codes are restricted to
ASCII
characters within the range of"?" (octal 077) to,,~,, (octal
176). Thus, binary value 000000 is converted to octal 077
(octal 0 + octal 077); binary 110101 is converted to octal
164 (octal 065 +octal 077); and binary 111111 is converted
to octal 176
(octal 077 + 077).
Figure 4-4 shows this
conversion for the sample character "A."
4-7

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
4.

bO
b1

b2
b3
b4
b5

Convert the resultant octal value for each sixel to its
equivalent character using the ASCII code table (Table 1-1)
or Table A-3.
Figure 4-4 shows the
ASCII
character
equivalent for the sixels in the sample character "A."

Q
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

• •
•
•
• •
•• • •
•
•
•
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

SAME AS COLUMN 1
SAME AS COLUMN 2
SAME AS COLUMN 3
SAME AS COLUMN 4
SAME AS COLUMN 5
100000 2 = 40 8 ; 40 8 + n 8 = 137 8 = _
000010 2 = 2 8 ; 2 8 +

n 8 = 101 8 =A

100100 2 = 44 8 ; 44 8 + n 8 = 143 8 = c
0010002 = 10s; 109 + 779 = 1079 = G
110000 2 = 60 8 ; 60 8 +

n 8 = 157 8 = o

0000002 =Os; Os+ 77s = 77s =?

bO
b1

b2
b3

0
0
0
0

••
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

••

0
0

SAME AS COLUMN 1

0
0
0
0

SAME AS COLUMN 1
SAME AS COLUMN 14

0011 2 = 3 8 ; 3 8 ; + n 8 = 102 8 = s
SAME AS COLUMN 1
MA-.1175-85

Figure 4-4:

Column Codes for Example 80-Column Font Character "A"

4-8

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
Now you can down-line load your character "A" (represented as a
string of ASCII characters) with a DECDLD sequence. You need to
design, break into sixels, and properly code each character you
want to include in your Dynamically Redefinable Character Set
(DRCS).

4.1.2.2 Design
Considerations - Theoretically,
you
can
manipulate any pixels within the character cell (apart from those
restricted in text mode). However, in order to design character
sets that display properly, you need to take several things into
account. Consider the size requirements of each character in the
set, before deciding size and placement within the character cell
matrix.
We suggest using the following
guidelines.
All
Professional text fonts adhere to these guidelines.

•

Because the pixel aspect ratio for the video display is
roughly 2.5 pixels in the horizontal direction for every one
in the vertical direction, a solid horizontal line appears
brighter than a solid vertical line. To insure an even
intensity in text mode, only turn on alternate horizontal
pixels.

•

Because of the necessity of turning on alternate horizontal
pixels, characters should have an odd number of horizontal
pixels. For symmetry, character height should also be an odd
number of pixels. Current fonts for the Professional are 9 x
7 (without descenders) and 9 x 9 (with descenders) in
80-column mode, and 5 x 7 (without decenders) and 5 x 9 (with
descenders) in 132-column mode.

•

In full-cell mode, unless you want adjacent characters to
touch each other, allow at least one row at the top and one
(preferably two) columns on the right to remain blank. In
80-column, text mode, these restrictions are built in. In
132-column, text mode, only the top row restriction governing
vertical spacing is built in. You must provide consistent
horizontal spacing, preferably on the right.

•

If you want the character to have the bold attribute, you
must leave two columns blank on the right. Characters are
balded by shifting the character pattern one column to the
right and overwriting the off pixels. This in effect doubles
the width of vertical pixels and fills in the off horizontal
pixels, resulting in an evenly balded character.

•

The reverse video attribute requires the same treatment as
bold, as it first bolds the character, then reverses all bit
settings.

4-9

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

•

The normal baseline for characters without descenders is row
8.
For characters with descenders, the baseline is row 7.

•

Underscoring occurs in row 9; anything written in that line
is overwritten by the underscore attribute.

4.1.2.3 Down-Line Loading a DRCS Character
Set - You
can
down-line load your DRCS character set by using the following
DECDLD device control string format:
DCS Pfn;Pcn;Pe;Pcms;Pw;Pt { Dscs Sxbpl;Sxbp2; ... ;Sxbpn ST

DCS is the device control string introducer.
Pfn;Pcn;Pe:Pcms;Pw;Pt are parameter characters,
separated by
semicolons, that define parameters described in Table 4-1. Valid
combinations for Peros, Pw, and Pt are described in Table 4-2.
Invalid combinations cause the DECDLD to be ignored.
{ is the final character that signals the end
characters and specifies a DECDLD function.

the

Dscs defines the character set ''name" for the soft font,
used in the Select Character Set (SCS) escape sequence.

parameter

and

Sxbpl;Sxbp2; ••• ;Sxbpn are ASCII character strings representing
from 1 to 94 sixel bit patterns.
Each bit pattern represents one
DRCS character. Character strings for each bit pattern are
separated by semicolons.
Each character string has the form:

s ... s;s ... s
where the first S ... S represents the upper columns
(sixels)
of
the DRCS character, the slash (2/5) advances the sixel pattern to
the lower columns (sixels) of the DRCS character, and the second
S ... S
represents
the lower columns
(sixels)
of the DRCS
character.
The column numbers in Figure 4-3 indicate the order
in which the columns (sixels) are loaded.

ST (9/12) is the string terminator.

4-10

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
Table 4-1
DECDLD Parameter Characters
Parameter

Name

Description

Font
Number

Specifies DRCS font buffer to be loaded. In native mode, this parameter has the following valid
values: 0, 1,2,3,4. In emulation mode, the following values are valid: 0, 1.

Pen

Starting
Character
Number

Selects starting character in DRCS font buffer to be loaded. For example, parameter value 1
specifies a column 2/row 1 character, parameter 94 specifies a column 7/row 14 character.

Erase
Control

Selects which characters are erased before loading:
O = erase all characters in this DRCS set
1 = erase only the characters that are being reloaded
2 = erase all characters in all DRCS sets (this font buffer number and other font buffer
numbers)

Pcms

Character
Matrix
Size

Defines the expected limit of the character matrix size
O = device default (12 x 10)
1 = (not used)
4 = 7 x 10

Width
Attribute

Text/
Full-Cell

Specifies the width attribute:
0 = device default (80 column)
1 = 80 column
2 = 132 column
Allows software to treat the font as a text font or a full-cell font:
O = device default (text)
1 = text
2 = full-cell
Full-cell fonts can individually address all pixels in a cell, while text fonts, in general, may not be
able to address all pixels individually.

Table 4-2
Valid Pcms, Pw, Pt Combinations
Pcms

Produces

0, 1,2

a font that can only be used in 80 column mode for either text or fullcell

0, 1,2

a font that can be used in 80 or 132 column mode for text or full-cell

Suppose you want to load a character
character "A" designed earlier.
You
device control string:

set with the example
could use the following

DCS 1;1;1;0 { sp @ ?oGcA_AcGo??/?B???????B?? ST
DCS introduces the sequence

4-11

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

1;1;1;0 specifies font buffer 1 (Pfn), places the "A"
in column
2/row 1 of the ASCII chart
(Pen), selects to erase only the
characters loaded (Pe)
and specifies the default
(12 x 10)
character matrix size (Pcms).

Note that Pw and Pt are not specified. Hence the default values,
80 column (Pw) and text font (Pt) are implemented.
{ indicates the end of the parameter
that this is a DECDLD control string.

characters

and

specifies

sp @ defines the character set as an unregistered soft set.
This
value is the recommended default value for user-defined sets.
The "sp'' represents one space.
You can use other Dscs values to
define other specific character sets.
?oGcA_AcGo?? are the character codes for the upper sixels of the
example DRCS character "A".

/ advances the sixel sequence to the lower sixels of the
DRCS character "A".

example

?B???????B?? are the character codes for the lower sixels of the
example DRCS character "A".
ST indicates the end of the device control string.

Normally, you would load more than one character at
separate sixel data by semicolons.

time

and

4.1.2.4 Clearing a Down-Line Loaded Character Set - You can
clear a character set that you have down-line loaded by using the
following DECDLD control sequence:

DCS Pfn;Pcn;Pe; { sp @ ST
where
Pfn indicates the font buffer to be cleared:

0,1,2,3,4

Pen indicates the starting character in the
erased:
1-94

font

Pe selects which DRCS is cleared:

0 - only the set indicated by Pfn,
2 - all character sets

4-12

buffer

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
Down-line loaded character sets are also cleared by:
•

performing the power-up self-test

•

using the Setup Recall or Default functions

•

using RIS or ESC c sequences

4.1.3

Sixel Graphics (VT200 terminal emulation mode only)

You can use device control strings to send and receive graphic
images in sixel format.
The following DIGITAL printers recognize
the sixel device control string:
LA12,
LA50,
LA100,
LA34-VA,
LN03.

4.1.3.1 Sixel Device Control String Format - The format
sixel device control string is as follows:

9/0
DCS

3/11
Pn

7/1
q

s ... s

the

9/12
ST

DCS is the control string introducer.
It is an 8-bit control
character that you can also express as an escape sequence for a
7-bit environment (ESC P).

The first Pn selects the pixel density (aspect ratio)
that the
terminal sends. This parameter is optional and should be set to
1.
; separates numeric parameters
The second Pn selects the status of the background color used
the terminal. This parameter has three possible values:

0 - device default (same as 2)
1 - use current color
2 - unwritten pixel positions will have specified backgroun
color
q indicates that this control string is a sixel command.

s ••• s are sixel data characters consisting of characters in the
range of ?
(octal 077)
to
(octal 176). Each character
represents six individual bits of data. The bits are represented
as a vertical 1 x 6 pixel matrix (a sixel), with the least
significant bit at the top.
The binary value of each character
4-13

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
4.1.3.4 Example of Sixel Data Stream - The following is a sample
of
a
complete color sixel transmission with accompanying
comments. White space has been inserted for clarity and is not a
part of the transmitted data.
The example uses the HLS color
coordinate system. The figure drawn is a green box,
filled in
with red.
The box is 500 dots wide by 32 dots high.
It has a
blue square in the center that is 36 dots wide by 14 dots high.
The box is positioned at the top margin and 200 dots from the
left margin.
The background is dark (black).
DCSlq
Color
Color
Color
Color

#0;1;0;0;0
#1;1;120;50;50
#2;1;0;50;50
#3;1;240;50;50
#3!200?

!5~

!490B

!5~$

#1!205?!490{-

#11205? !22r 136F !22r$

#2!205? !227? !36w-

#3!200? !5~ !490? !5~$
#1!205? 122r !36? 122r$

#2!205? !227?

!36~-

#3!200? !5~ !490? !5~$
#1!205? !22T !36_ !22T$

0
1
2
3

is
is
is
is

Dark (Black).
Red.
Blue.
Green.

First six rows of dots:
Color 3, 200 blank columns
5 full columns
490 columns with top 2 dots
5 full columns
Color 1, 205 blank columns
490 columns with bottom 4 dots
Second six rows of dots:
Color 3, 200 blank columns
5 full columns
490 blank columns
5 full columns
Color 1, 205 blank columns
227 full columns
36 columns with top 3 dots
227 full columns
Color 2, 205 blank columns
227 blank columns
36 columns with bottom 3 dots
Third six rows of dots:
Color 3, same as second six rows
Color 1, 205 blank columns
227 full columns
36 blank columns
227 full columns
Color 2, 205 blank columns
227 blank columns
36 full columns
Fourth six rows of dots:
Color 3, same as second six rows
Color 1, 205 blank columns
4-16

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
227 full columns
36 columns with only bottom do
Color 2, 205 blank columns
227 blank columns
36 columns with top 5 dots

#2!205? !227? !36A-

#3!200? !5- !490? !5-$
#1!205? ! 490- -

Fifth six rows of dots:
Color 3, same as second six rows
Color 1, 205 blank columns
490 full columns

#3!200?!500B-

Sixth six rows of dots:
Color 3, 200 blank columns
500 columns with top 2 dots

ST
Condensed, this looks like:
DCS1q#3;1;240;50;50#1;1;120;50;50#2;1;0;50;50#0;1;0;0;0
#3 200? !5- !490B !5-$#1!205?!490{#3 200? !5- !490? !5-$#1!205? !22T !36F !22T$#2!205? !227? !36w#3 200? !5- !490? !5-$#1!205? !22T !36? !22T$#2!205? !227? !36-#3 200? !5- !490? !5-$#1!205? !22T !36 !22T$#2!205? !227? !36A#3 200? !5- !490? !5-$#1!205? !490-#3 200?!500B-ST
Note, in the second, third, and fourth rows, you can combine
values for color 2, so that !205? and !227? become !432?.
example used separate values simply to indicate the edge of
box in a consistent way.

4.1.4

the
The
the

User Defined Keys (DECUDK)

You can use User Defined Keys only in VT200 terminal emulation
mode.
Fifteen of the terminal's top-row function keys are
programmable:
F6 through F20. When the terminal is in VT200
emulation mode, you can down-line load one or more key sequences
for the programmable function keys by using a DECUDK device
control string. You can use the programmed values of the keys by
pressing <SHIFT>/<FUNCTION KEY>.
There are 512 bytes available to the 15 programmable function
keys.
Space is provided on a first-come, first-serve basis.
Once the space has been used, no more keys can be defined unless
some space is freed.

4-17

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
You can free space in one of three ways:
•

Redefine a key or keys using DECUDK.

•

Clear a key or keys using DECUDK.

•

Clear the definition of all keys by using a Reset to Initial
State (RIS) sequence, provided you have selected "Clear on
Recall" from the PRO/Communications General Terminal Setup
Menu.

NOTE
Loss of power or exiting the terminal emulator
results in loss of UDK definitions, unless you
have saved the UDK definitions.

4.1.4.1 DECUDK Device Control String Format - The device control
string format for down-line loading UDK functions is:

9/0
DCS

7/12

Pc;Pl

Kly/stl;ky2/st2; ... kyn/stn

9/12
ST

where
DCS introduces the control string.
Pc is the clear parameter.
This determines which
cleared and when.
Pc may have the following values:

keys

are

Meaning

none

Clears all keys before loading new values.
Loads
each key as it is defined.
This is the default
value.

Clears all keys before loading new values.
each key as it is defined.

Clears key to be redefined just before loading
it. Does not clear keys not being redefined.

4-18

Loads

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

NOTE
You can define any particular key to contain 512
bytes or the number of available bytes when that
key is loaded, whichever is less.
For example,
if you set the clear parameter to 1, it is
possible that a key load might fail
because of
lack of room, even though the final total for all
keys would have been 512 bytes or less.
Failure
is possible because keys are cleared and loaded
sequentially.
Sequential loading could result in
intermediate storage requirements higher than 512
bytes, even though the final requirement would be
512 bytes or less.

Pl is the lock parameter.
This determines whether
the
key
definitions are locked or not locked after you load them.
Values
for Pl are as follows:
Pl

Meaning

none

At the time of loading, locks keys against future
redefinition.
If you want to redefine locked
keys, you must unlock them by using setup.

At the time of loading, locks keys against future
redefinition.
If you want to redefine locked
keys, you must unlock them by using setup.
This
is the default value.

Does not lock keys against
future
redefinition.
Keys
remain available
for further redefinition
with another DECUDK string.

The solidus (I) is a final character that designates this control
string as a DECUDK.
Kyn/Stn are key definition strings.
Each key definition string
consists of a
key selector number (Kyn) and a string parameter
(Stn) separated by a slash (/, 2/15).
The key selector numbers
(Kyn)
specify the particular key to be redefined, and the string
parameters (Stn) are the encoded contents of the keys.
The
string parameters (Stn) consist of hex pairs in the range 3/0 to
3/9 ("0" to "9"), 4/1 to 4/6 ("A" to "F"), and 6/1 to 6/6 ("a" to
"f").
When you combine these hex values they represent an 8-bit
quantity.
This allows any of the 256 character codes to be used
in the key sequence.
You can use key definition strings in any
order and can specify multiple definition strings by using a
semicolon (;) as a delimiter.

4-19

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS

The following lists the definable keys
numbers (Kyn).

and

Key

Kyn

F6
F7
F8
F9
F10

17
18
19
20
21

F11
F12
F13
F14

23
24
25
26

HELP
DO

28
29

F17
F18
F19
F20

31
32
33
34

their

key

selector

ST terminates the device control string.

4.1.4.2 Advice When Loading Keys - Keep the
when loading User Defined Keys.

following

mind

•

Applications should use the UDK function to reclaim key
definition space.
You can do this by ciearing keys without
locking them.
Once the keys have been cleared, you can use
the UDK function to redefine the keys and lock them.

•

Generally, you should not leave keys unlocked.
This could
cause a breach of security for the terminal user and the
computer system.

•

The host must keep track of space available for definitions.

•

If you redefine a key, the old sequence is lost. This may
free up space if the new sequence is shorter than the
previous definition.

•

The terminal uses a special lock to arbitrate the programming
of keys.
This lock can be turned on or off through Setup.
It may also be turned on with a DECUDK from the host.
The
lock acts globally over all programmable keys.

4-20

DCS - DEVICE CONTROL STRINGS
•

The default value for each key is the saved default value or
empty. When you clear the keys, they are set back to the
empty condition.
If you save the default value of UDKs, you
have the option (using the PRO/Communications Setup Menu) of
loading or clearing them under the following conditions:
loss of power, receipt of a RIS sequence, or selecting
"Recall defaults" from the PRO/Communications Setup Menu. An
aborted function key load (by error or other means) locks the
keys, saves the already successfully loaded fraction, and
sends the rest of the DECUDK sequence to the screen. An
invalid DCS hex pair in a key definition string results in an
aborted load.

4.1.4.3 DECOOK Example - Suppose you want to define key F20 to
be "PRINT," and you want to do this without clearing or locking
any~other keys.
The first part of your device control string
would look like this.
9/0
DCS

3/1
1

3/11

3/1

7/12

3/3
3

3/4
4

2/15

The 34 after the final character I (7/12)
is the key selector
number (Kyn value)
for key F20.
After the slash character
(2/15), you would list the string parameters (Stn)
that contain
the hex-coded contents of the keys. The encoding for "PRINT" is
as follows:
p

R
I =
N
T

50
52
49
4E
54

hex
hex
hex
hex
hex

The rest of the string parameters after the slash character would
look like this:
3/5
5

3/0
0

3/5
5

3/2
2

3/4

3/9

4-21

3/4
4

4/5
E

3/5
5

3/4
4

9/12
ST

(OSC) - OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL STRINGS
4.2

(OSC) - OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL STRINGS

Operating system control strings are used only by the operating
system.
The Professional recognizes these strings and ignores
whatever data comes between the OSC introducer and ST terminator.
OSC is an 8-bit control character (9/13) that can also be
expressed as an escape sequence as follows:
1/11
ESC

4.3

5/13
l

PM - PRIVACY MESSAGE CONTROL STRINGS

Privacy control strings are used to embed messages within the
data stream.
The Professional recognizes these strings and
ignores whatever data comes between the PM introducer and ST
terminator.
PM is an 8-bit control character (9/14) that can
also be expressed as an escape sequence as follows:
1/11
ESC

4.4

5/14

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

Applications can use application program command strings to
perform certain functions.
AFC is an 8-bit control character
(9/15) that can also be expressed as an escape sequence as
follows:
1/11
ESC

5/15

When the Professional is under the control of Pro/Communications,
it can operate as an "intelligent terminal" both in terminal
emulation mode and background mode.
These capabilities assume
the Professional is part of a distributed processing environment.
In such an environment, the emulator (and other communications
services) are used as part of an application that is split
between the Professional and a remote host system.
In this
environment,
the user typically communicates witf'l'e'iEfier a Iocal
application program or a remote system in terminal emulation
mode.

4-22

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

The extensions to terminal emulation
mode
allow
another
application to enter and leave terminal emulation mode under
program control. Applications operating in terminal emulation
mode can also spawn local tasks.
In background mode a host can trigger a background task on a
Professional.
Background mode requires that you enable "Remote
access" (using the Pro/Communications Setup Menu) for each line
you want to receive unsolicited data.
Enabling "Remote access"
on those lines starts the Listener program (FTLISN) that monitors
those lines and interprets received data as either a file
transfer trigger or as a remote task spawn command.
The Professional gains these extended capabilities through a
number of private control functions implemented in its terminal
emulator.
You can invoke these private control functions through
several Application Program Command control strings. APC control
strings allow a host to spawn a local task on the Professional
and to send data to a local task residing on the Professional.
These control functions are disabled by default.
To enable them,
the application using the terminal emulator must define the
logical COM$DTE_APC_EXTN.
To define the logical, use the PROLOG
system service or the CLOG$ system directive.
(See System
Reference Manual.) This logical contains
the
introductory
characters
allowed
by the application.
For the features
described in the following sections, the logical should have the
value "abd" and allow only the remote task spawn commands "ab".
The APC control string has the following general format:
APC

<ident>

<str>

where
APC

is either the 8-bit APC control code or the 7-bit
escape sequence ESC

<ident>

is a
single
alphanumeric
character
which
introduces the APC sequence being transmitted

<str>

is a string of characters that is
the <ident> character preceding it

dependent

is either the 8-bit control
escape sequence ESC

4-23

code

the

7-bit

AFC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS
NOTE

The <str> parameter should not contain
any
control characters that may be interpreted by the
host terminal driver, PRO/Communications driver
or emulator. Specifically, ESC, XON and XOFF may
not be used. Other control characters may also
be precluded, depending on the operating system
and communications equipment.

4.4.1

Remote Task Spawning with APC strings

Two APC strings spawn a local task on the Professional and pass a
command line to it.
These control strings have the following
format:
APC

<ident>

<task>

<cmd>

where
<ident>

can be either the "a" or "b" characters
description of each is given below)

<task>

is a string of one to six characters, identifying
the task to be spawned; the characters must be in
RAD-50 format (upper case
only);
no
case
conversion is performed by the emulator
is a mandatory exclamation point that
the task name from the <cmd> parameter

<cmd>

separates

is a character string from 0 to 80 bytes; this is
the command line to be passed to the task being
spawned; this command line is not converted to
upper case by the emulator

4-24

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

The remote spawn functions works as
value of <ident>:

follows,

depending

the

"a"

The terminal emulator adds a prefix onto the command line
that is being spawned.
This prefix consists of the
device specification in the
form
DDn:
for
the
communication line from which the remote spawn request
was received, for example, XKO:,
XT1:,
XT2:.
This
is
followed by a single space and the command line as sent
by the host.
The
terminal emulator
detaches
the
communication line and keyboard prior to spawning the
task.
It reattaches these devices
if the spawn fails
(task not installed or active) or after the spawned task
exits or emits status.

"b"

The terminal emulator passes the
command line without
modification
to
the
requested task.
The
terminal
emulator detaches the communication line and keyboard
prior to spawning the task.
It reattaches these devices
if the spawn fails (task not installed or active)
or
after the spawned task exits or emits status.

Both the "a"
and
"b"
forms of the APC control string are
supported in background mode.
If the "Listener" program receives
these strings, it attempts to spawn the task designated.
If the
task is successfully spawned, the "Listener" program waits for
the task to exit or emit status before attempting to read further
unsolicited data from the communication line.
The "Listener"
accepts these control strings only if "Remote access" is enabled.

4.4.2

Remote Task Communication with APC Strings

The following APC control string allows a host to send data to a
local task.
The data is passed using the Variable Send Data
system directive (VSDA$).
The local task may be dormant or
active;
if dormant,
it is requested.
The receiving task must
perform an emit (EMST$) status to signal acceptance of the data.
Until it receives the emit status response, the emulator does not
accept any further input from the host.
The emulator detaches the keyboard before
sending each message
and reattaches when it
receives
the emit status
from the
designated task.
Either
the
receiving
task may process the
keyboard input during this period, or the emulator empties the
typeahead buffer before reattachment.
The data is passed to the
designated task using a Variable Send Request and Connect
directive (VSRC$).

4-25

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

If the data exceeds 509 bytes, two or more messages are
the designated task:
APC

<task>

<mesg>

sent

where
d

identifies the APC sequence.

<task>

is a
the
must
case

string of one to six characters, identifying
task to receive the message; the characters
be in Rad-50 format {upper case only);
no
conversion is performed by the emulator.

is a mandatory exclamation point that separates
the task name from the <msg> parameter.
<mesg>

is a character string to be passed to the
designated task by variable send data messages.

The <mesg> parameter should not contain any control characters
that
may
be
interpreted
by
the host terminal driver,
PRO/Communications driver or emulator.
Specifically,
ESC, XON,
and XOFF should not be used.
Other control characters may also
be illegal, depending on the operating system and communications
equipment.
If the string exceeds 509 bytes, two or more messages
are sent to the designated task.
The first message starts with
the two-character sequence "APC d" followed by the message text.
The last message is terminated by ST control character.
The
message size is rounded up to the next highest word.
Therefore,
on receipt of the last message, the size may be one byte less
than the size specified in the Directive Status Word {DSW). The
message size includes the two-word task name of the task to which
status is to be returned.
The actual message starts after the
two-word task name header.
This function is provided specifically for applications that pass
long messages to a local task.
An example of this is an
application that uses the local FMS interface on the Professional
for data entry and validation or record modification.
The remote
system could send the record down to the Professional, where it
is then displayed, edited and validated within a local FMS form,
then returned to the host· using the
"Pseudo Input"
facility
described below.

4-26

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

The terminal emulator accepts pseudo keyboard input to be
processed and transmitted to the host and pseudo communications
line input to be processed and transmitted to the video.
In both
cases,
the data is presented to the emulator using the variable
Send Data (VSDA$) system directive.
The general format of the
message sent to the emulator is as follows:
WD.00

BY.00 Stream identifier
0
1

WD.01

Keyboard Input
Communication Line Input

BY.01 zero
Message Size (byte) maximum 508

WD.02
Data to be processed
WD.255
If the first word of the message contains binary zero, the input
source is considered to be the keyboard.
If the first word of
the message contains binary one, the input source is considered
to be the communication line. The second word of the message
informs the emulator how many bytes to process as pseudo input.
Pseudo
input
is
always
passed
directly to either the
communications line or the video without interpretation.
After transmitting the data, the emulator emits status to the
task that sent the data to the emulator.
Further data can then
be sent to the emulator.
Failure to adhere to this protocol
results in the loss of data.
In general, server tasks spawned by the APC "a",
"b" or "d"
control strings should issue a Variable Send Request and Connect
directive (VSRC$) when sending data to the emulator for return to
the remote system.
While the server task is active, the emulator is stopped and does
not continue processing until it receives the emit status from
the server task.
If the server task returns data to the
remote
system,
it must emit status to free the emulator to process the
message.
Subsequent messages can be sent after the emulator
emits status back to the server.

4-27

APC - APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND STRINGS

4.4.3

Message Identification Suppression

In a distributed processing environment, you may want
an
application to make it transparent to the user whether he is
talking to a local or remote system. An application can request
the terminal emulator to suppress its initial identification
message and the message output whenever terminal emulation mode
is entered.
Do this by creating a logical COM$DTE_MSG with the
value Y.

4-28

APPENDIX A
CHARACTER SET SUMMARY

This appendix contains
character sets:

the

code

tables

for

the

following

•

DEC Multinational Character Set (ASCII graphics mapped to GL
and DEC Supplemental Graphics mapped to GR) - Table A-1

•

DEC Special Graphics Set (mapped to GL) - Table A-2

•

DEC Technical Character Set (mapped to GL) - Table A-3

Octal, decimal, and hexadecimal numeric codes appear next to each
character on all code tables.
Tables A-4 through A-6 list the the following
each character in the sets:

information

about

•

official name of each character

•

the column/row position from 0/0 through 15/15 of each
character

•

the octal, decimal, and hexadecimal code values for each
column/row position.

Note that the column/row positions and codes presume the
in Tables A-1 through A-3.

A-1

mapping

Table A-1
DEC Multinational Character Set (CO and GL Codes)

BITS

,....---4
ROW

NUL

0
0
0

SOH

1
1
1

0 0

STX

OLE

2
2
3

ETX

EOT

ENO

3
3

DC1
(XON}

4
4
4
5
5

100
64
40

120
80
50

140
96
60

160
112
70

21
17
11

41
33
21

61
49
31

101
65
41

121
81
51

141
97
61

161
113
71

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

162
114
72

63
51
33

DC4

44
36
24

64
52
34

NAK

25
21
15

45
37
25

SYN

26
22
16

ETB

27
23
17

ACK

BEL

7
7
7

10
8
8

CAN

1 0

11
9
9

31
25
19

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
lA

13
11

ESC

33
27
18

14
12

34
28
lC

35
29
ID

1 1

15
13
D

16
14
E

36
30
1E

17
15
F

37
31
1F

103
67
43

OCTAL

DECIMAL

143
99
63

163
115
73

144
11)0
64

164
116
74

65
53
35

105
69
45

125
85
55

145
101
65

165
117
75

66
54
36

106
70
46

126
86
56

146
102
66

166
118
76

67
55
37

107
71
47

(

50
40
28

70
56
38

110
72
48

)

51
41
29

71
57
39

52
42
2A

72
58
3A

53
43
28

73
59
38

*
+

38
26
47
39
27

127
87
57

103
67

167
119

150
104
68

170
120
78

131
89
59

151
105
69

171
121
79

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

[

133
91
58

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

130
88
58

111
73
49

112
74
4A
113
75
48

147

172
122
7A

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

134
92
5C

154
108
6C

174
124
7C

55
45
2D

75
61
3D

115
77
4D

]

135
93
5D

155
109
6D

}

175
125
7D

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

57
47
2F

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

J 1B

98
62

KEY
33

123
53

r-co C O D E S - - - - - - - - - - - - - ( A S CGLCODES
l l GRAPHICS)

ESC

142

124
84
54

CHARACTER

122
82

104
68
44

B
1

24
20
14

6
6

60
48
30

DC3

43
35
23

1
0

40
32
20

23
19
13

22
18
12

5
6

1
0

20
16
10

DC2
IXOFFI

0
I

0
1

0
0

b5
b4 b3 b2 b 1

0
0

COLUMN

HEX

A-2

......

DEL

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

Table A-1
DEC Multinational Character Set (C1 and GR Codes)

1
0
0

200
128
80

DCS

220
144
90

201
129
81

PU1

221
145
91

202
130
82

PU2

203
131
83

STS

ESA

207
135
87

EPA

227
151
97

HTS

210
136
88

230
152
98

HTJ

211
137
B9

231
153
99

VTS

212
138
SA

232
154
9A

PLO

213
139
SB

CS!

233
155
9B

PLU

214
140
SC

234
156
9C

217
143
SF

APC

261
177
B1

361
241
F1

262
178
B2

244
164
A4

226
150
96

SS3

SPA

243
163
A3

206
134
86

216
142
BE

360
240
FO

SSA

SS2

340
224
ED

223
147
93

225
149
95

osc

320
208
DO

'
A

300
192

242
162
A2

205
133
85

215
141

260
176
BO

NEL

240
160
AO

263
179
83

b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

1--1

222
146
92

224
148
94

241
161
A1

CCH

BITS

204
132
84

IND

b7
1

b8
1

COLUMN

1
1

0
1

0
0

ROW

301
193
Cl

321
209
D1

302
194
C2

322
210
D2

342
226
E2

362
242
F2

303
195
C3

323
211
D3

343
227
E3

363
243
F3

344
228
E4

364
244
F4

365
245
F5

366
246
F6

264
180
84

••
A

304

196
C4

-..

341
225
E1

324
212
D4

325
213
D5

345
229
E5

326
214
D6

346
230
E6

245
165
A5

265
181
B5

305
197
C5

246
166
A6

,-r

266
182
B6

306
198
C6

247
167
A7

267
183
B7

307
199
C7

327
215
D7

347
231
E7

367
247
F7

)]'.

250
168
AB

270
184
BB

'
E

310
200

fl)

330
216
DB

350
232
EB

f;f

370
248
FB

251
169
A9

271
185
89

311
201
C9

'
u

331
217
D9

351
233
E9

371
249
F9

252
170
AA

272
186
BA

312
202
CA

332
218
DA

352
234
EA

"
u

372
250
FA

373
251
FB

374
252
FC

375
253
FD

376
254
FE

1 1

253
171
AB
254
172
AC

235
157
90

255
173
AD

~36

15B
9E

256
174
AE

237
159
9F

257
175
AF

273
1B7
BB

274
1B8
BC

1/2

,
A

••
E

275
1B9
BD

276
190
BE
(.,

277
191
BF

313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
205
CD

••

334
220
DC

••
y

335
221
DD

336
222
DE

337
223
DF

I_
GR CODES
r
- C1CODES------·1«-~~~~~- (DEC SUPPLEMENTAL
GRAPHICS)

A-3

..e

••

316
206
CE
317
207
CF

333
219
DB

,
A

..
I

353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237

..
..y

356
23B
EE
357
239
EF

377

255
FF

Table A-2
DEC Special Graphics Set Mapped into GL

,_...,

COLUMN

BITS

ROW

0
0

85
84 83 82 81

NUL

1
1
1

SOH

OLE

0
0

DC1
IXONI

STX

ETX

3
3
3
4
4
4

EOT

ENO

DC2

2
2

5
5

20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12

DC3
IXOFFI

23
19
13

DC4

24
20
14

NAK

45
37
25

SYN

26
22
16

ETB

27
23
17

47
39
27

CAN

30
24
18

(

50
40
28

ACK

1·

BEL

7
7
7

10
8
8

31
25
19
32
26
1A

11
9
9

12
10
A

SUB

13
11
B

ESC

15
13
0

35
29
10

16
14
E

36
30
1E

17
15
F

37
31
1F

33
27
34
28
1C

43
35

25
21
15

62
50
32

42
34
22

14
12

61
49
31

60
48
30

64
52
34

41
33
21

44
36
24

40
32
20

)

*
+

38
26

64
40

101
65
41

102
66
42

103
67
43

65
53
35

66
54
36

67
55
37

70
56
38

51
41
29

52
42
2A

71
57
39
58
3A
73
59

120
80
50

140

121
81
51

122
82
52

83
53

125
85
55

106
70
46

126
86
56

107
71
47

127
87
57

~SC I

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

SCAN 5

142
98
62

100
64

164
116
74

145
101
65

165
117
75

146
102
66

166
118
76

103
67

112
74
4A

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

153
107

113
75

[

133
91

116
78
4E

77
63
3F

117
79 {BLANK)
4F

'
]
A

I
~

114

SCAN 9

144

162

150
104
68

161
113
71

163
115
73

143
99
63

147

160
112
70

SCAN 7

A-4

151
105
69

167
119

77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123

154
108
6C

-;.

174
124
7C

135
93
50

155
109
60

175
125
70

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

137
95
5F

GLCODES
i----co C O D E S - - - - - - - - - - - ( D E C SPECIAL
GRAPHICS)

CHARACTER

SCAN 3

131
89
59

76
62
3E

KEY

60
141
97
61

111
73
49

72
48

115
77
40

57
47
2F

130
88
58

110

56
46
2E

105
69
45

75
61
30

55
45
20

513

•

123

134
92
5C

74
60
3C

1
0

114
76
4C

124
84
54

53
43
28
54
44
2C

100

104
68
44

1
0

63
51
33

6
6
6

1
0

0
1

SCAN 1

157
111
6F

176
126
7E

DEL

177
127
7F

Table A-3:

DEC Technical Character Set Mapped into GL

BITS

r--

ROW

SOH

0 0

STX

40
32
20

}

60
48
30

OLE

1
1
1

DC1
(XON)

21
17
11

41
33
21

61
49
31

DC2

22
18
12

42
34
22

62
50
32

DC3
IXOFFI

23
19
13

43
35
23

DC4

24
20
14

r
J

38
26

47
39
27

l
l

50
40
28

2
2
3

16
10

ETX

EOT

4
4
4

NAK

25
21
15

SYN

26
22
16

ETB

27
23
17

CAN

30
24
18

3
3

ENO

5
5
5

ACK

6
6
6

BEL

7
7
7

10
8
8

1 0

36
24
45
37
25
46

106
70
46

146
102
66

166
118
76

67
55
37

107
71
47

56
38

Sl
41
29

S7
39

72
58
3A

13
11
B

ESC

33
27
18

(

53
43
2B

73
59
3B

34
28
lC

S4
44
2C

74
60
3C

35
29
10

)

55
45
20

-=!-

7S
61
30

)

S6
46
2E

76
62
3E

57
47
2F

63
3F

37
31
lF

17
lS
F

:::::

•
•

67
43

{

KEY

___ _
ESC

OCTAL

DECIMAL

...._ lB _. HEX

A-5

83
53

126
86

127
87
S7

"'
'Y

--.

150
104
68

111
73
49

131
89
59

151
105
69

112
74
4A

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

7S
48

:::>

133
91
58

153
107
6B

114
76
4C

134
92
SC

1S4
108
6C

135
93
SD

116
78
4E

136
94
SE

156
110
6E

117
79
4F

137
9S
SF

157
111
6F

72
48

113

115

77
40

147
103
67

130
88
58

110

GLCODES
(TECHNICAL)

CHARACTER

164
116
74

<t>

52
42
2A

66
S4
36

163
115
73

...

32
26
lA

143
99
63

165
117
7S

SUB

114

145
101
65

12
10
A

162

€

"'
p

98
62

125
85
55

142

105
69
45

161
113
71

1 0

141
97
61

JI:

65
53
35

36
30
1E

123

160
112
70

144
100
64

16
14
E

11
9
9

122
82

140

124
84
54

121
81
51

104
68
44

103

120
80
50

1 1

102
66
42

64
52
34

I
.,

64
40

1
0

63
51
33

15
13
D

100

101
65
41

31
2S
19

14
12

1
0

0
0
0

1
0

NUL

0
1

0
0

b5
b4 b3 b2 b1

0
0

COLUMN

1SS
109
60

167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172

...

..
t

122
7A
173
123
78
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

Table A-4
DEC Multinational Character Set Numeric Codes
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

NUL

0/00

SOH

0/01

STX

Description
Null
Start of heading

0/02

Start of text

ETX

0/03

End of text

EOT

0/04

End of transmission

ENO

0/05

Enquiry

ACK

0/06

Acknowledge

BEL

0/07

Bell

0/08

Backspace

0/09

Horizontal tab

0/10

Line feed

0/11

Vertical tab

0/12

Form feed

0/13

Carriage return

SO (LS1)

0/14

Shift out (Lock shift G1)

SI (LSO)

0/15

Shift in (Lock shift GO)

OLE

1/00

Data link escape

DC1

1/01

Device control 1

DC2

1/02

Device control 2

DC3

1/03

Device control 3

DC4

1/04

Device control 4

NAK

1/05

Negative acknowledge

SYN

1/06

Synchronous idle

ETB

1/07

End of transmission block

CAN

1/08

Cancel

1/09

End of medium

SUB

1/10

Substitute

ESC

1/11

Escape

1/12

File separator

1/13

Group separator

1/14

Record separator
Unit separator

1/15

2/00

Space

2/01

Exclamation point

2/02

Double quotation mark

2/03

Number sign, octothorp

A-6

Table A-4 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

2/04

Dollar sign

2/05

Percent sign

2/06

Ampersand

2/07

Apostrophe

2/08

Opening parenthesis

2/09

Closing parenthesis

2/10

Asterisk

2/11

Plus

2/12

Comma

2/13

Hyphen, minus

2/14

Period, decimal point

2/15

Slash

3/00

Digit 0

3/01

Digit 1

3/02

Digit 2

3/03

Digit3

3/04

Digit4

3/05

Digit 5

3/06

Digit6

3/07

Digit?

3/08

Digit8

3/09

Digit9

3/10

Colon

3/11

Semicolon

3/12

Less than

Equals

Greater than

3/13

3/14

3/15

Question mark

4/00

100 ~

Commercial at

4/01

101

Capital A

4/02

102

Capital 8

4/03

103

Capital C

4/04

104

Capital D

4/05

105

Capital E

4/06

106

Capital F

4/07

107

Capital G

4/08

110

Capital H

4/09

111

Capital I

A-7

Table A-4 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

4/10

112

Capital J

4/11

113

Capital K

4/12

114

Capital L

4/13

11S

Capital M

4/14

116

Capital N

4/1S

117

Capital 0

S/00

120

Capital P

S/01

121

Capital Q

S/02

122

Capital R

S/03

123

Capital S

S/04

124

Capital T

u
v
w

S/OS

12S

Capital U

S/06

126

Capital V

S/07

127

CapitalW

S/08

130

Capital X

S/09

131

Capital Y

S/10

132

Capital

S/11

133

Opening bracket

S/12

134

Backslash

S/13

13S

Closing bracket

5/14

136

Circumflex accent

S/1S

137

Underline

6/00

140

Opening single quotation mark,
grave accent

6/01

141

Small a

6/02

142

Smallb

6/03

143

Smallc

6/04

100

144

Smalld

6/05

101

14S

Smalle

6/06

102

146

Smallf

6/07

103

147

Smallg

6/08

104

1SO

Smallh

6/09

10S

1S1

Smalli

6/10

106

1S2

Smallj

6/11

107

1S3

Smallk

6/12

108

1S4

Small I

6/13

109

15S

Smallm

6/14

110

1S6

Smalln

A-8

Table A-4 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

6/15

111

157

Smallo

7/00

112

160

Smallp

7/01

113

161

Smallq

7/02

114

162

Small r

7/03

115

163

Smalls

7/04

116

164

Small t

7/05

117

165

Smail u

u
v

7/06

118

166

Smallv

7/07

119

167

Smallw

7/08

120

170

Smallx

7/09

121

171

Smally

7/10

122

172

Small z

7/11

123

173

Opening brace

7/12

124

174

Vertical line

7/13

125

175

Closing brace

7/14

126

176

Tilde

7/15

127

177

Delete

8/00

128

200

Reserved

8/01

129

201

Reserved

8/02

130

202

Reserved

8/03

131

203

Reserved

IND

8/04

132

204

Index

NEL

8/05

133

205

Next line

SSA

8/06

134

206

Start of selected area

ESA

8/07

135

207

End of selected area

HTS

8/08

136

210

Horizontal tab set
Horizontal tab with justify

DEL

HTJ

8/09

137

211

VTS

8/10

138

212

Vertical tab set

PLD

8/11

139

213

Partial line down

PLU

8/12

140

214

Partial line up

8/13

141

215

Reverse index

SS2

8/14

142

216

Single shift G2

SS3

8/15

143

217

Single shift G3

DCS

9/00

144

220

Device control string

PU1

9/01

145

221

Private use one

PU2

9/02

146

222

Private use two

STS

9/03

147

223

Set transmit state

CCH

9/04

148

224

Cancel character

A-9

Table A-4 (Cont.)

Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

9/0S

149

22S

Message waiting

SPA

9/06

1SO

226

Start of protected area

9/07

1S1

227

End of protected area

9/0B

1S2

230

Reserved

9/09

1S3

231

Reserved

9/10

1S4

232

Reserved

EPA

9/11

1SS

233

Control Sequence introducer

9/12

1S6

234

String terminator

osc

9/13

1S7

23S

Operating system command

9/14

1SB

236

Privacy message

APC

9/1S

1S9

237

Application program command

10/00

160

240

Reserved

10/01

161

241

Inverted exclamation mark

10/02

162

242

Cent sign

10/03

163

243

Pound sign

10/04

164

244

Reserved

10/0S

16S

24S

Yen sign

10/06

166

246

Reserved

CSI

£
¥

10/07

167

247

Section sign

;o::

10/0B

16B

2SO

General currency sign

10/09

169

2S1

10/10

170

2S2

Feminine ordinal indicator

10/11

171

2S3

Angle quotation mark left

10/12

172

2S4

Reserved

10/13

173

2SS

Reserved

10/14

174

2S6

Reserved

10/1S

17S

2S7

Reserved

11/00

176

260

Degree sign

11/01

177

261

Plus/minus sign

11/02

17B

262

Superscript 2

11/03

179

263

Superscript 3

11/04

1BO

264

Reserved

µ,

11/0S

1B1

26S

Micro sign

11/06

1B2

266

Paragraph sign, pilcrow

11/07

1B3

267

Middle dot

11/0B

1B4

270

Reserved

11/09

1BS

271

Superscript 1

11/10

1B6

272

Masculine ordinal indicator

A-10

Table A-4 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

11 /11

187

273

Angle quotation mark right

11 /12

188

274

Fraction one quarter

112

11 /13

189

275

Fraction one half

11/14

190

276

Reserved

11/15

191

277

Inverted question mark

A
A

12/00

192

300

Capital A with grave accent

12/01

193

301

Capital A with acute accent

•
A

12/02

194

302

Capital A with circumflex accent

12/03

195

303

Capital A with tilde

12/04

196

304

Capital A with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

12/05

197

305

Capital A with ring

12/06

198

306

Capital AE ligature

\:
E

12/07

199

307

Capital C with cedilla

12/08

200

310

Capital E with grave accent

311

Capital E with acute accent

12/09

201

12/10

202

312

Capital E with circumflex accent

12/11

203

313

Capital E with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

12/12

204

314

Capital I with grave accent

12/13

205

315

Capital I with acute accent

12/14

206

316

Capital I with circumflex accent

12/15

207

317

Capital I with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

13/00

208

320

Reserved

13/01

209

321

Capital N with tilde

0
6
0•

13/02

210

322

Capital 0 with grave accent

13/03

211

323

Capital 0 with acute accent

13/04

212

324

Capital O with circumflex accent

13/05

213

325

Capital 0 with tilde

()

13/06

214

326

Capital O with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

13/07

215

327

Capital OE ligature

(/)

13/08

216

330

Capital 0 with slash

13/09

217

331

Capital U with grave accent

13/10

218

Capital U with acute accent

13/11

219

333

Capital U with circumflex accent

13/12

220

334

Capital U with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

A-11

Table A-4 (Cont.)

Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

13/13

221

335

Capital Y with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

13/14

222

336

Reserved

13/15

223

337

German small sharp s

14/00

224

340

Small a with grave accent

14/01

225

341

Small a with acute accent

14/02

226

342

Small a with circumflex accent

a
a

14/03

227

343

Small a with tilde

14/04

228

344

Small a with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

14/05

229

345

Small a with ring

14/06

230

346

Small ae ligature

14/07

231

347

Small c with cedilla

e
e

14/08

232

350

Small e with grave accent

14/09

233

351

Small e with acute accent

14/10

234

352

Small e with circumflex accent

14/11

235

353

Small e with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

14/12

236

354

Small i with grave accent

14/13

237

355

Small i with acute accent

14/14

238

356

Small i with circumflex accent

14/15

239

357

Small i with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

A
I

15/00

240

360

Reserved

15/01

241

361

Small n with tilde

15/02

242

362

Small o with grave accent

15/03

243

363

Small o with acute accent

15/04

244

364

Small o with circumflex accent

15/05

245

365

Small o with tilde

15/06

246

366

Small o with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

15/07

247

367

Small oe ligature

15/08

248

370

Small o with slash

15/09

249

371

Small u with grave accent

250

372

Small u with acute accent

15/10

15/11

251

373

Small u with circumflex accent

15/12

252

374

Small u with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

15/13

253

375

Small y with diaeresis or umlaut
mark

15/14

254

376

Reserved

15/15

255

377

Reserved

A-12

Table A-5
DEC Special Graphics Set and Numeric Codes
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

5/15

137

Blank

6/0

140

Diamond

6/1

141

Checkerboard
(error
indicator)

6/2

142

Horizontal
tab

6/3

143

Form feed

6/4

100

144

Carriage
return

6/5

101

145

Line feed

6/6

102

146

Degree symbol

6/7

103

147

Plus/minus

6/8

104

150

New line

6/9

105

151

Vertical tab

6/10

106

152

Lower-right
corner

6/11

107

153

Upper-right
corner

6/12

108

154

Upper-left
corner

6/13

109

155

Lower-left
corner

6/14

110

156

Crossing
lines

6/15

111

157

Horizontal
line - Scan 1

7/0

112

160

Horizontal
line - Scan 3

7/1

113

161

Horizontal
line - Scan 5

7/2

114

162

Horizontal
line - Scan 7

7/3

115

163

Horizontal
line - Scan 8

7/4

116

164

Left "T"

7/5

117

165

Right "T"

7/6

118

166

Bottom "T"

7/7

119

167

Top "T"

7/8

120

170

Vertical bar

7/9

121

171

Less than or
equal to

7/10

122

172

Greater than
or equal to

A-13

Table A-5 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

7/11

123

173

7/12

124

174

Not equal to

. 7/13

125

175

UK pound sign

7/14

126

176

Centered dot

Table A-6
DEC Technical Character Set and Numeric Codes
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

2/0

Reserved

2/1

Left radical

2/2

Top left
radical

2/3

Horizontal
connector

2/4

Top integral

2/5

Bottom
integral

2/6

Vertical
connector

2/7

Top left
square
bracket

2/8

Bottom left
square
bracket

2/9

Top right
square
bracket

2/10

Bottom right
square
bracket

2/11

Top left
parenthesis

2/12

Bottom left·
parenthesis

2/13

Top right
parenthesis

2/14

Bottom right
parenthesis

2/15

Left middle
curly brace

3/0

Right middle
curly brace

3/1

Top left
summation

A-14

Table A-6 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

3/2

Bottom left
summation

3/3

Top vertical
summation
connector

3/4

Bottom
vertical
summation
connector

3/5

Top right
summation

3/6

Bottom right
summation

3/7

Right middle
summation

3/8

Reserved

3/9

ReseNed

3/10

ReseNed

3/11

Reserved

3/12

Less than or
equal

3/13

Not equal

3/14

Greater than
or equal

3/15

Integral

4/0

100

Therefore

4/1

101

Variation,
proportional
to

4/2

102

Infinity

4/3

103

Division,
divided by

4/4

104

Capital
delta,
triangle

4/5

105

Nabla, de!

4/6

106

Capital phi

4/7

107

Capital gamma

4/8

110

Is
approximate
to

4/9

111

Similar or
equal to

4/10

112

Capital theta

4/11

113

Times, cross
product

A-15

Table A-6 (Cont.)
Char

Col/Row

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

4/12

114

Capital
lambda

4/13

115

If and only
if

4/14

116

Implies

4/15

117

Identical to

5/0

120

Capital pi,
product

5/1

121

Capital psi

5/2

122

Reserved

5/3

123

Capital
sigma,
summation

5/4

124

Reserved

S/5

125

Rese1ved

5/6

126

Radical

S/7

127

Capital
omega, Ohm
sign

S/8

130

Capital xi

5/9

131

Capital
upsilon

5/10

132

Is included
in

5/11

133

Includes

S/12

134

Intersection

5/13

13S

Union

5/14

136

Logical and

5/15

137

Logical or

6/0

140

Logical not

6/1

141

Small alpha

6/2

142

Small beta
Small chi

6/3

143

6/4

100

144

Small delta

6/5

101

145

Small epsilon

6/6

102

146

Small phi

6/7

103

147

Small gamma

6/8

104

150

Small eta

6/9

105

151

Small iota

6/10

106

1S2

Small theta

6/11

107

1S3

Small kappa

A-16

Table A-6 (Cont.)
Char

Hex.

Decimal

Octal

Description

6/12

108

154

Small lambda

6/13

109

155

Reserved

6/14

110

156

Small nu

6/15

111

157

Partial
derivative

7/0

112

160

Small pi

7/1

113

161

Small psi

7/2

114

162

Small rho

Col/Row

7/3

115

163

Small sigma

7/4

116

164

Small tau

7/5

117

165

Reserved

7/6

118

166

Function

7/7

119

167

Small omega

7/8

120

170

Small xi

7/9

121

171

Small upsilon

7/10

122

172

Small zeta

7/11

123

173

Left arrow

7/12

124

174

Upward arrow

7/13

125

175

Right arrow

7/14

126

176

Downward arrow

7/15

127

177

Reserved

A-17

APPENDIX B
KEYBOARD ILLUSTRATIONS

Illustrations of all national keyboards for the Professional
on the next several pages, in the following order:

are

United States/Canada
United Kingdom
Belgium (Flemish)
Canada (French)
Denmark
Finland
France/Belgium
Germany/Austria
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (French)
Switzerland (German)
Keys that generate different characters in Office mode and Data
Processing mode are shaded in red.
"Dead diacritical" keys are
shaded in gray.
Chapter 2 describes the use of these keys.

B-1

United States/Canada

B-2

~~)!en

~~ir:~n

Break

Set-up

Interrupt

Resume

Cancel

~c~~nen

Exit

F11
(ESC)

F12
(BS)

F13
(Lf)

Addtnl
Options

Hold Screen
-

Lock
-

Compo&e
-

Wait
-

f17

f1B

f19

f20

DDDDD DDDDD DODD Bl ~ I DODD
LJLJLJLJ

OJ
I

[][][][]

[][][JD
[][][JD"'"'

r=1D

Belgium (Flemish)

B-4

ooooonooooonoooona1 "' ""' noooo
0
D~LiLiLiDLi~LiLiuLiEJ
BB~ Duuu

uPrr1\rJ~~~gtJtJtBeP1g EJ~G R~~B
1~

1[][][]0[][][][:]0Dul~

1~:~;::~·

[!]~[!]

LJD[]rl
1° IDLJ

Denmark

B-6

Pida

naytto

Kopioi

nilyrto

Seis

Aseto

Keskeyta

Jatka

Peruuta

toiminto Plianiiytti:l

Lopata

F11

(ESC)

F12

(BS)

F13

(LF)

L1s11valmnat

Pidi:in1iytt0

..(}

DDDDDflDDDDDnoooona1
~Dum~LiLILI~~~~~t:=J
DEJEJ[][JLJLJ~D[]LJ
CJLlEJ[J[J0EJ[]EJ[JDEJ~D8

IJ[)PEJD[][J[JLMJLJLI:]

Yhdelmi;i

To<o""

Odola

F17

F18

F19

F20

noooo

BBB

Du~D

EJ§§J

[][][][]

~EEi

P9Fl[

LJLJ[JD

France/Belgium

B-8

Bild
stop

Bild
drucl<en

/" ,

Betriebamodus

DDDDD

Fort·
setz•rn

Zuruck·
nehmen

Haupt·
bild

.
ertlg

DDDDD

F11
(ESC)

F12
(BS)

F13
(LF)

z
usa

DODD

~1'1Fl!§lf$1f%1f&ll/l[JITIF1\TIR
.~.;.:.·.;:·'.·.· ;.' K§I
~l_1__JLLJLil1._JlLlLilL.J s

LILI l!!__l~L_J

Ll[JEJ[]~[JD[]DEJ[][ijDn

uLJLl~~D~~u~D~ ~~

l[][J[JD[][][JL:JDDul

I'"''"'"
Kombi

Bild stop
-

-0-

Kombi
-

Warte
-

F17

F18

F19

FZO

Bl Ao•~h'~ I DODD

Holland

B-10

Blocco
scherm

Stnmpa
scherm

lntarr
corm.m

Impostszione

Arresto

Ripristino

Annulfo

Sch&rm
princ

Uscita

F11
(ESC)

F12
(BS)

F13
(LF)

Altre
opzionl

Scherma bloccado{}-

c·6mposiz

Atrnsa

F17

F18

F19

F20

ooooonooooonoooona1 ,. ""''"· 1noooo
~Fl~~~[[]~~~~~~~~
~~~i.'.'.__JLJ '

LJlLJ~~LlLJLJL__J

Fl~~Fl

DCEJ'"""'
DO

LJLJLJLJ

~~[~

P9B[

d[~~11,F:1r~;~r~r~2rft21Ej~B~~ a~EJ ti[l~jB
LlJ~l(l~D~~~[JDLJ~[

Norway

B-12

DDDDD DDDDD DODD Bl-I DODD
OJ
I

Sweden

B-14

DDDDD DDDDD DODD
OJ
I

p
Ul

Switzerland (German)

DODI~~

[][;][;]~D

D~[]b]D

[][][;][Jc

B-16

APPENDIX C
TEXT AND GRAPHICS MODE INTERACTION - NATIVE MODE

You can mix text and graphics in your application.
But to do it
properly,
you need to understand the behavior of text and
graphics modes.
Here are some guidelines.
There is currently no standard which addresses the interaction or
integration of text mode and graphics mode.
A future standard or
different video hardware will probably affect the type of
integration that is supported on the Professional.
On the Professional, if you write text
(in text mode)
over
graphics,
the graphics image beneath that text will be lost.
This is because characters in text mode are written as cells.
Graphics written over text will destroy only the text area which
it affects directly.
If you want to write text over graphics, it
is recommended that you use graphics mode text.
If you want to mix text (text mode)
and graphics on the same
display,
it is
recommended that you use each character line
defined for text mode exclusively for text or graphics,
but not
both.
Before using several lines of the display for a graphics
region,
clear those lines with a text-mode command.
This will prevent
text-mode software from behaving as if there
were
still
characters within the region.
Also, if the underline cursor is moved over a character cell
containing graphics,
the graphics content of the cell will be
lost.
Text mode and graphics mode have different cursor presentations.
Whenever the video display is idle, a cursor is usually presented
on the display.
You get a graphics-mode pixel-oriented cursor
(for example a cross hair) if the most recent data sent to the
Terminal Subsystem was for graphics.
You get a
text-mode
character-cell-oriented cursor otherwise.

C-1

Text-mode character cells which are blinking continue to blink
when graphics mode is entered, even if the characters are altered
or erased by a graphics-mode command.
You should erase such
cells by a text-mode command before displaying the graphics.
If the extended bitmap option (EBO) is not on the Professional,
only one bitmap plane is available, and graphics and text are
forced to use the same plane. With the EBO present, three bitmap
planes
are available.
The behavior of text and graphics
integration may differ depending on whether or not the EBO is
present.
If the EBO is installed on the Professional, receipt of an RIS
(reset to initial state) sequence defaults the output map to one
of the following sets of settings depending on whether a color or
monochrome monitor is present.
Entry

Color

-----

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

black
blue
red
green
white
white
white
white

Monochrome

----------

intensity-0
intensity-2
intensity~4

intensity-6
intensity-6
intensity-6
intensity-6
intensity-6

These defaults are consistent with a VT125 terminal.
Text mode
affects only one plane corresponding to output map value of 4.
Text mode operations do not modify the output map but are
affected by the settings made while in graphics mode.
If the EBO is absent, the graphics content of a line is lost if
the line is erased or scrolled off the screen while in text mode.
If the EBO is present, the graphics content of a line is lost
only
if the line is scrolled off the screen when doing
full-screen scroll.

C-2

APPENDIX D
DIFFERENCES IN EMULATED FEATURES

Differences between VT100 and VT200 series terminals and the
emulated features on the Professional are treated throughout this
manual.
This appendix groups the information about
these
differences in one place.
As in the rest of this manual, VT100 mode and VT200 mode refer to
VT100
and VT200 terminal emulation as implemented on the
Professional through the PRO/Communications application.
This
appendix treats differences in both text and graphics mode for
VT100 and VT200 series terminals.
Section D.1 compares the VT100 emulation
VT102 terminal.

text

mode

the

Section D. 2 compares the VT200 emulation
VT220 terminal.

text

mode

the

Section D.3 compares the VT100 emulation in graphics mode (ReGIS)
to the VT125 terminal.
Section D.4 compares the VT200 emulation in graphics mode (ReGIS)
to the VT240 terminal.

D.1

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

In VT100 mode emulation, the Professional
with the VT102 terminal.

D.1.1

highly

compatible

Seven- and Eight-Bit Support

VT100 mode supports only the 7-bit encoding system.
Cl
characters and GR graphic characters are not recognized.

D-1

control

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

D.1.2

Communications

A VT102 terminal provides both half duplex and full duplex
communication modes.
The communications services provided in
VT100 mode on the Professional are for full duplex mode only.

D.1.3

Keyboard

All keys used on a VT102 terminal are represented on the
Professional
keyboard
in
VT102 mode and have equivalent
functions/codes.
The following differences exist.
On the Professional, the cursor control keys are on the editing
keypad,
and the <HOLD SCREEN>, <PRINT SCREEN>, and <BREAK> keys
are top-row function keys.
<HOLD SCREEN> is equivalent to <NO
SCROLL> on the main array of a VT102 Terminal.
(the resulting
code is sent to the application).
Pressing the <Print Screen> key on the Professional is not
equivalent
to
printing
the
screen on a VT102 terminal
(simultaneously pressing the <SHIFT> and <(PRINT)/ENTER> keys).
While <Print Screen> prints text like <SHIFT> and <PRINT/ENTER>,
it is not affected by the DECPEX or DECPFF commands.
A further
difference is that <SHIFT>/<PRINT SCREEN> prints the screen in
graphics mode, and <CNTL>/<PRINT SCREEN> toggles the Auto-print.
The <ESC>, <BACK SPACE>, and <LINE FEED> keys on the main array
of a VT102 terminal do not exist on the main array of the
Professional.
In VTlOO mode, the following top-row function keys
are used instead:
<Fll (ESC)>, <F12 (BS)>, <F13 (LF)>. These
and LF,
keys generate the standard control codes for ESC, BS,
respectively.

D.1.4

Codes Transmitted from Keyboard to Application

The codes transmitted to an application from the keyboard
between VT100 mode and a VT102 terminal as follows.

differ

The Professional supports over a dozen national keyboards.
Most
keyboards
have keys that produce some GR (8-bit)
graphic
characters. Also, GR characters can be generated from all
keyboards by means of Compose sequences.
If the application
environment does not support 8-bit codes, no GR characters can be
transmitted.
The following CO (7-bit) control characters, generated
keyboard with the <CTRL> key, are created differently:
D-2

from

the

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL
Control
Character
Mnemonic

Key Pressed
with <Ctrl>
(VTlOO Mode)

Key Pressed
with <Ctrl>
(VT102 Terminal)

NUL
ESC
FS
GS
RS

2
3
4
5
6
7

space bar

[

/
l
?

On both a VT102 terminal and the Professional in VTlOO mode,
all
function key codes ~re transmitted using 7-bit code extensions.
On a VT102 terminal, the Setup function is asynchronous and may
be invoked at any time without affecting the current context. On
the Professional, Setup is not asynchronous.
On the Professional, if two or more keys are held down, the
recently depressed key is selected for autorepeat.

D.1.5

most

Response of "Terminal" to Received Codes

D.1.5.1 Control Characters - The following
characters are processed differently in
VT102 terminal.

CO (7-bit)
control
VTlOO mode than on a

ETX

Ignored on the Professional.

EOT

Ignored on the Professional.

CAN

No error character is displayed on the Professional.
On a
VT102 terminal,
CAN causes an error character to appear on
the screen.

SUB

Causes a different error character (reverse question mark)
to be displayed on the Professional as compared to on a
VT102 terminal.

D.1.5.2 Control Strings - A control string consists of
an
opening delimiter (DCS, OSC, PM, or AFC), a command string, and
the string terminator (ST) closing delimiter. A VT102 terminal
does not recognize control strings:
the command strings are
merely displayed on the screen and no action is taken.

D-3

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL
A Professional in VTlOO emulation mode recognizes ReGIS
strings and Application Program Control (APC) strings.

control

D.1.5.3 Control Sequences - On the Professional in terminal
emulation,
control sequences may contain as many as six (6)
parameters. Additional parameters are ignored.
Each parameter
may have a value in the range of zero (0) to 65535. Any value
over this range is treated as the maximum value.
Also, within
the context of a particular command, values which exceed the
maximum values for the command (for example 24 or 80) are treated
as the contextual maximum.

D.1.5.4 Setup Characteristics and Mode Selection - Much of the
Setup functionality is different on the Professional from that on
a VT102 terminal. On the Professional,
the user interface to
Setup is provided through the P/OS Terminal Setup Menu for all
modes and, additionally,
through the PRO/Communications Setup
menus
for
terminal emulation modes.
Also, Setup on the
Professional is not asynchronous.

D.1.5.5 Scrolling - On the Professional, smooth
scroll
is
possible only for the entire screen. Smooth split-screen scroll
is not possible. The Professional uses jump split-screen scroll
instead.
Full-screen scroll affects all bitmap planes when the
extended bitmap option is being used.
Jump scroll affects only
the plane that is used for text mode. No other video activity
occurs while smooth scroll is in progress.
This includes
blinking of the cursor or other characters.

D.1.5.6 Cursor
Characteristics - On
the
Professional,
a
graphics-mode pixel-oriented cursor (for example, a cross hair)
appears on the screen if the most recent data sent to the
Professional
was
in
graphics
mode.
A
text-mode
character-cell-oriented cursor appears otherwise. The period for
cursor blinking is one second (2/3 on, 1/3 off).
The Professional supports the cursor-enable
(DECTCEM)
sequence,
which is not supported on a VT102 terminal. This sequence
affects the cursor in both text mode and graphics mode.

D-4

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

D.1.5.7

Character Sets and Selection - The character fonts,
affecting the visual appearance of displayed characters, are
different on the Professional from those on a VT102 terminal.
In VT100 mode emulation, the default character set mapping is
ASCII graphics in GL.
On a VT102 terminal, the 7-bit ASCII or
U.K.
set is the default set, depending on the Setup selection.
In VT100 mode the Professional's graphic repertoire consists of
the following two graphic sets: ASCII Graphics and DEC Special
Graphics (VT100 Line Drawing).
The VT102 terminal's graphic
repertoire consists of the following graphic sets: ASCII, U.K.,
and DEC Special Graphics.
In VT100 mode the Professional supports the same lock
the VT102:

shifts

LSO (SI) and LSl(SO).
The Professional in VT100 mode does not
support the SS2 and SS3 single shifts; the VT102 supports them.

On a VT102 terminal,
GO and Gl are the only sets you can
designate.
You then use SI to invoke GO into GL and SO to invoke
Gl into GL.
G2 and G3 can not be designated by program control
on a VT102 terminal. A VT102 terminal always interprets G2 and
G3 as the default graphic character sets.
They are selected in
Set Up.
You can invoke G2 and G3 for only one character at a
time, using SS2 and SS3, after which you return to the previous
character set.
Software that relies on the VT102's "permanent"
designation of G2 and G3 may be
incompatible
with
the
Professional.

D.1.5.8

Character

Attributes - Differences

character

attributes are as follows.

Reverse

Video - On
the
Professional,
normal-intensity
reverse-video characters are black on a white background, and
bold-intensity reverse-video characters are gray on white.
A
VT102
terminal
uses
black
on gray and black on white
respectively.

Bold - On the Professional, bold (increased
available in 132-column mode and is ignored.

D-5

intensity)

not

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

Blink - On the Professional, you can have up to 100 blink fields
(a field consists of adjacent blinking character cells within a
single horizontal line).
If you exceed this number,
all blink
fields
stop blinking until the overflow condition ceases.
Blinking character cells continue to blink while displaying
graphics.
If this is not desired, you should erase such cells
before displaying graphics.
The period for character cell
blinking is 1-1/3 seconds,
and the duty cycle is 50 percent.
Normal intensity characters are produced.

D.1.5.9

Printing - Differences in printing are as follows.

Printer Controller Mode - The media copy (MC) printer controller
mode is implemented different
on the Professional versus on a
VT102 terminal.
On a VT102 terminal, you enter printer controller mode only if
the printer is ready.
On the Professional, you always enter
printer controller mode whenever the command is issued.
On the Professional, the printer controller mode sequence turns
on printer controller mode and sends CAN (1/8) to the printer.
The Professional transmits received characters,
including RIS
sequences,
to the printer without displaying them on the screen.
All characters and character sequences except NUL, CSI 5 i,
and
CSI
4 i
are sent to the printer. The Professional does not
insert or delete spaces, or provide line delimiters,
or select
the
correct
printer
character
set.
This data path is
unidirectional, and therefore an application cannot receive data
from the printer while printer controller mode is on.
Printer controller mode sequences that are used to turn that mode
on or off are not sent to the printer. All other sequences are.
To turn printer controller mode off,
you must send the above
sequence exactly as indicated or its equivalent 7-bit format (ESC
[ 4 i )
0

Printer Form Feed Mode (DECPFF) - On the Professional,
no space
is cleared between print screens if DECPFF is reset (off).
On a
VT102 terminal, there is one additional linefeed between print
screens.

D-6

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

Print Screen {Text or Graphics Mode) - The DECHCP
(Hard Copy)
sequence is not
recognized on a VT102 terminal.
In VT100
emulation mode, your application can use the DECHCP
(Hard Copy)
sequence to print the text contents of the screen.
The DECPEX
and DECPFF modes have no effect on DECHCP.
Pressing the
<PRINT
SCREEN> key has the same effect as using the DECHCP sequence.
If
the printer is unavailable or busy when the DECHCP sequence is
sent, the print request will still be assumed completed.

D.1.5.10

Reports - Differences in reports are as follows.

Device Status
t (DSR) - On a
VT102 terminal,
one of the
possible responses to a DSR printer status request indicates that
the DTR (data-terminal-re
) signal of the printer has not been
on (asserted)
since the terminal was last turned on or reset.
The Professional's corresponding response is:
The printer is not
ready and never has been, when tested, since the last time the
Professional was booted.

Device Attributes
(DA) - In VT100 mode,
response to a DA request is as follows:
CSI

the

Professional's

This is the same answer that a Level 2 device returns.
In contrast the response of a VT102 terminal is as follows:
ESC [ ? 6 c

D.1.5.11 Reset - On the Professional, the reset-to-initial-state
(RIS)
sequence
initializes the Terminal Subsystem to default
states and clears the screen.
RIS affects the text-mode states,
graphics-mode states,
and
keyboard.
Except for two keyboard states (Compose mode on/off,
keyboard lock/unlock), RIS affects only the states that can be
set by an application.
RIS has no effect on states such as
printer status or cursor block/underline, that cannot be changed
from an application.
On a VT102 terminal, RIS resets all states
(programmable or not, such as keyclick).

D-7

VT100 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT102 TERMINAL

On the Professional, when RIS is selected, Compose mode is off
and the keyboard becomes unlocked even if it were locked by KAM
or DC3.
The default states selected by the RIS sequences
Chapter 3.

are

listed

D.1.5.12

Interlace - On the Professional, your application can
enable and disable interlacing of the raster scan by specifying
the DECINLM sequence.
DECINLM is not supported on a VT102
terminal.

D.1.5.13

Tests and Adjustments - The self tests initiated with
the DECTST sequence on a VT102 terminal are not supported on the
Professional.
However, much of this functionality
(including
data loop-back)
is provided in the Professional's power up
diagnostics sequence.
On the Professional and on a VT102 terminal, an application can
use the DECALN sequence to display a screen alignment pattern.
On the Professional, DECALN displays rectangles on the screen.
On a VT102 terminal DECALN displays capital "E"s.

D.1.5.14 Keyboard Indicator - In VT102 mode,
there
is
no
user-loadable LED indicator on the keyboard, and therefore there
is no support for turning one on or off. The DECLL (load LED)
sequence is used on a VT102 terminal to turn an LED indicator on
or off.

D.1.6

Other Features

The bell can be disabled on the Professional.
On the Professional, any screen display will disappear
(video
blanking) if there has been no activity in the Terminal Subsystem
for 30 minutes.
There is no support for a 50-Hz screen refresh
Professional.
Only the 60-Hz rate is supported.

rate

the

There is no support for the "word processing flag" setup feature
on the Professional.
This feature reverses the codes sent by the
<LINEFEED> key and the <I\> (vertical bar, backslash) key.

D-8

VT200 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT220 TERMINAL

D.2
D.2.1

VT200 MODE COMPARED WITH THE VT220 TERMINAL

Keyboard

Hold screen operates differently on the VT220,
depending on
whether XOFF is disabled using the Setup Menu. When XOFF is
disabled, <CTRL>/<Q> and <CTRL>/<S> act as local keys.
They send
no codes to the host.
<CTRL>/<S> lights the Hold Screen LED and
stops scrolling.
<CTRL>/<Q> starts scrolling.
When XOFF is
enabled the user doesn't handle the flow control.
Although
<CTRL>/<S> lights the Hold Screen LED,
it does not
stop
scrolling.
On the Professional, pressing <HOLD SCREEN> sends an XOFF to the
host and stops the flow of characters.
Pressing <HOLD SCREEN>
again sends an XON to the host and resumes the flow of
characters. While you can use the <CTRL><S> and <CTRL><Q> method
of controlling character flow, it is not recommended because of
the larger buffer on the Professional.
On the Professional, pressing <CTRL>/<HOLD
screen and stops the flow of characters.

D.3

SCREEN>

blanks

the

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS

The Professional's ReGIS graphics mode, which is the same for
VT100 and VT200 emulation, implements a few features differently
than a VT125.
The variations result both from recent updates to
the Remote Graphics Instruction Set (ReGIS) and from differences
that exist between the Professional hardware and VT125 terminal
hardware.
Default values for ReGIS graphics mode on the Professional are
compatible
with the default values for a VT125 terminal.
However,
because the
Professional
must
provide
graphics
functionality for the CORE Graphics Library and for PRO/BASIC,
the variations described in the following sections can occur when
previously developed VT125 ReGIS applications execute on a
Professional in ReGIS graphics mode.
A VT125 terminal has a single text plane and two graphics planes.
Therefore,
on the Professional, the extended bitmap option (EBO)
is required to emulate a VT125 terminal and prevent text and
graphics overwriting each other. Also, due to hardware/software
environment differences,
it sometimes takes longer for
the
Professional to execute the same VT125 graphics function.

D-9

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS

D.3.1

Image Distortion Factors

The Professional's 960 x 240 pixel display density provides a
2.5-to-1 pixel-aspect ratio, while a VT125 terminal has a 768 x
240 pixel density resulting in a 2.0-to-1 pixel-aspect ratio.
The increased density of the Professional is designed for
high-resolution graphic images, rather than the medium-resolution
graphics 'of the VT125. The following subsections describe some
of the imaging differences caused by the Professional's improved
density.

D.3.1.1 Distortion Scaling - When
certain
screen-addressing
parameters are used with the VT125 terminal, circles (drawn using
the ReGIS c command) appear round, but squares (drawn using four
equal-length arguments to the ReGIS v command) do not appear
square.
Similarly, the VT125 does not always represent angles
faithfully.
These inconsistencies are not reproduced in the
Professional; its circles always are round, its squares square,
and
its
angles
correctly
drawn,
regardless
of
the
screen-addressing parameters.
An image that intentionally exploits the distortion in the
VT125's
screen-addressing mapping is not distorted in the
Professional.
Note that, when
using
the
VT125
default
screen-addressing parameters, this incompatibility does not arise
because the default screen addressing uses the entire screen area
without distortion.

D.3.1.2 Pattern
Registration - Standard
(predefined)
VT125
patterns 7,
8, and 9 are represented in the following table.
Note that on the Professional, these patterns are shifted left
with
the
most
significant
bit set,
an aid in pattern
registration. Only minor differences are expected when these
patterns display on the Professional.

Table D-1:

Pattern Registration

Pattern No.
7

8
9

VT125
Bit Pattern

Professional
Bit Pattern

00100001
00011001
10000110

10000100
11001000
10000110

D-10

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS

D.3.2

Shading Differences

D.3.2.1 Two New Shading Options - The Professional introduces
two additional shading options:
(1) shading to a vertical line
(the W(S[x]) command) and (2) shading to a point
(the W(S[x,y])
command).
Existing VT125 applications are not affected because
the Professional's default shading is to a horizontal line,
the
VT125 terminal's only shading option.

D.3.2.2 Character Shading and Text Attributes - For shading with
characters,
Professional
capabilities match VT125 terminal
attributes with one exception. The Professional does not use the
italic attribute when drawing a shaded area with character fill.
Any VT125 application using italic-attribute character fill
appears without the italics when run on the Professional. All
other character-fill options (size attributes including height,
multiplier, and integral size) are supported.
The italic effect can be achieved by loading a tilted character
into a loadable character location and then specifying that
character as the fill character. This change produces the same
effect on both the Professional and the VT125 terminal.

D.3.3

Screen-Addressing Considerations

D.3.3.1 Pixel-Aspect
Ratio - When
VT125
default
screen
addressing is used on the Professional (768 x 480 logical pixels)
some horizontal pixels are duplicated (about one in four)
to
produce the same VT125 picture.
For applications to take
advantage of the increased resolution of the Professional (with a
more direct logical to physical pixel mapping ability), use an
explicit screen addressing of 960 x 600.

D.3.3.2 General Screen-Scaling Method - The Professional uses a
more general scaling algorithm than the VT125 terminal when
mapping user-specified screen-addressing parameters with the
physical screen.
Therefore,
images might use more of the
physical display area when displayed on the Professional.
The VT125 terminal uses integral multiples or integral divisions
when mapping explicit screen-addressing parameters to physical
pixels. This method can waste a substantial portion of the
display area.
For example,
a 1024H x 1024V addressing scheme
uses 512H x 256V logical pixels when mapped on a VT125 terminal.
The same scheme uses 480H x 480V logical pixels when mapped onto
D-11

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
the Professional. Note that the Professional does not distort
the picture-aspect ratio while the VT125 distorts at a 2:1 ratio.

D.3.3.3 Decimal-Fraction Support - The Professional permits the
use of decimal fractions in screen-addressing parameters and
coordinates while in VT100 and VT200 graphics mode.
Fractional
digits are significant, subject to the specific image resolution.
This feature facilitates the use of the unit-square addressing (0
to 1 coordinates).

For programs designed for the VT125, previously ignored decimal
portions of screen-addressing parameters become significant on
the Professional.
Integer parameter values are not affected.

D.3.3.4 Clipping Offscreen Areas - The VT125 terminal's memory
can store images in a 768 x 256 physical pixel array, an area
addressable with ReGIS commands. The VT125's display provides a
window that can display 768 x 240 physical pixels out of the 768
x 256 pixels; there is an extra 16 horizontal pixel scan lines
that are addressable and displayable.

In contrast, the Professional defines the addressable bitmap
memory as 960 x 240 physical pixels. Areas of memory outside the
vertical 240-line range are clipped and cannot be addressed,
displayed,
or
revealed
by
scrolling.
With
default
screen-addressing parameters,
this incompatibility does
not
occur,
since there is no viewable screen area beyond the defined
768 x 240
physical
pixel
display.
Moreover,
explicit
screen-scrolling commands to memory areas outside the 240-pixel
vertical limit result in a display of the current background
color instead of any hidden pixel image.

D.3.3.5 Graphics Processor Memory Position Stack Size - The
Professional
has a 16-position stack for storing graphics
processor memory locations, as opposed to the VT125's 10-position
stack.
Note that an application using position-stack overflow
keyed to overflow on the eleventh entry can execute incorrectly
when running on the Professional.
The ReGIS V(B) ... (E) and
P(B) ... (E) commands are used to perform stack manipulation.

D-12

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS

D.3.4

Scrolling Differences

D.3.4.1 Text/Graphics Independent Scrolling - The Professional
does not permit independent scrolling of text and graphics
images. Different bitmap planes cannot scroll independently,
and, with the extended bitmap (EBO) option, a full-screen scroll
affects all bitmap planes.
Although a VT125 terminal permits text and graphics to scroll
separately (the ReGIS screen (S) command), programs utilizing
this VT125 feature (not recommended) do not operate correctly
when run on the Professional.

D.3.4.2 No Wrap-Around Scrolling - Once a graphics image scrolls
off the Professional screen,
the image is lost; it cannot be
retrieved unless it is redrawn.
The Professional does not
support
either
horizontal
or vertical image wrap-around.
Although the VT125 terminal wraps around both horizontally and
vertically, wrap-around is deemed undesirable on the Professional
because text and graphics share the same bitmap.

D.3.4.3 Fixed-Origin Scrolling - The origin point of a graphics
image remains fixed to the screen in VT100 and VT200 graphics
mode on the Professional. The origin is the 0,0 point defined by
the ReGIS screen-addressing (S(A)) command. On a VT125 terminal,
the origin point moves with the image (fixed to the bitmap)
to
take advantage of scrolling for offscreen memory.
While operating in the Professional's VT100 and VT200 graphics
mode,
image handling requires that the application maintain a
scroll offset in order to determine locations relative to the
origin point.
Note that specific screen locations on the
Professional always retain the same address and simplify the
generation of strip charts.

D.3.5

Graphics Text Variations

A ReGIS application program that explicitly specifies text size
(rather
than
using
the
text standard sizes)
should be
transportable between a VT125 terminal and the Professional.
It
is also recommended that a ReGIS position report be solicited
after drawing a long text string to determine the exact location
of the current drawing point.
Otherwise, misalignment of text
with some other graphical images could result.

D-13

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS

D.3.5.1 Color/Text/Graphics Interdependence - The Professional
has three planes of bitmap memory and an eight-bit-wide color
map, allowing display of up to eight simultaneous colors from a
256-color palette (eight levels of gray-scale on monochrome
monitor). However, one of the three planes usually is dedicated
for text. The VT125 provides a six-bit-wide color map with four
simultaneous colors from a 64-color palette
(four levels of
gray-scale on monochrome).
On the Professional, when one plane is used for text the text
display
and
graphics
images
can be written and erased
independently. Also, a text display can be made to blink without
affecting graphic images; however, independent scrolling cannot
be done.
Destructive text and graphics action can occur when full graphics
capability
(eight
simultaneous colors)
is used.
In this
instance, text and graphic images might overwrite each other and
destroy the previously drawn image.

D.3.5.2 Loadable Alphabets - Applications using VT125 loadable
alphabets perform appropriately on the Professional. Up to three
loadable alphabets of 95 characters each are permitted.
The
default VT125 alphabet characters have 10 rows of eight pixels
each.

D.3.5.3 Slashed;unslashed Zero Character - To concur with ASCII
standards,
the Professional's VT125 graphics mode predefined
character set contains a zero character (0) without a diagonal
slash mark. On a VT125 terminal, zero characters are slashed to
indicate a zero digit, rather than a capitalized letter 0.

D.3.5.4 Display/Unit Cell Size Effect - A display cell is the
rectangular screen area in which a drawn character resides as
opposed to the unit cell, whic~ is the rectangular screen area
making up the character itself. Generally display cell size is
slightly larger than unit cell size, providing a margin of space
surrounding the character and preventing characters from merging
together. When a graphics text character display cell size is
significantly larger than the cell size defined for a unit cell,
the Professional's display differs from the display on a VT125
terminal.
Figure D-1 illustrates the two different display types.
This
display reaction only occurs when you specify a markedly larger
D-14

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
display cell size in relation to unit
cell
size.
The
Professional draws a single copy of the text character in the
upper left corner of the display cell, as shown on the left in
Figure D-1.
The character is in the current unit cell size, and
the rest of that display cell either fills with the background
color or remains unchanged,
depending on the current writing
mode.
A VT125 terminal draws as many copies of the text character at
unit cell size as needed to fill the horizontal unit-size area of
the display cell.
In an attempt to complete the display cell,
the VT125 terminal fills the vertical direction with whatever
adjacent characters reside in character storage.
Each vertical
character repeats to fill
the horizontal area as shown on the
right in Figure D-1.

I a
I

aaaaaaaaaaaa
bbbbbbbbbbbb
cccccccccccc
dddddddddddd
eeeeeeeeeeee
fffffff fffff
gggggggggggg
hhhhhhhhhhhh

I
I
I
I
I
Professional

Figure D-1:

VT125 Terminal

Display/Unit-Cell Size Effect

D.3.5.5 Specifying Unit-Cell Size - The Professional offers two
methods for specifying the size of a graphics text unit cell.
The unit-cell size can be specified indirectly
with
the
multiplier
T(M)
option for both terminals.
However,
the
Professional also permits direct specification of unit-cell size
with the T(U) command. Modification of existing applications is
not necessary; however, both the old and new methods are
supported on the Professional.

D.3.5.6 Screen-Addressing Coordinates - Text-cell size on the
Professional in VTlOO and VT200 graphics mode is relative to
current screen addressing coordinates, while the VT125 terminal
does not take current screen-addressing coordinates into account

D-15

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
when specifying the size of graphics text cells.
An application using explicit (non-default) screen addressing and
text-cell size produces text in proportion to the current screen
addressing. The same application on a VT125 terminal does not
take screen addressing into consideration and produces text sized
by the specified constant physical pixel count.

D.3.6

Screen Time Delay Differences

D.3.6.1 Fixed Tick Length - On the Professional, the screen time
delay option permits you to specify a multiple of ticks with the
length of each tick fixed at 1/64 of a second, the frequency of
the Professional's system clock. The screen time delay option
specifies the number of ticks to wait before processing the next
ReGIS command.
For example, the command S(T16) specifies 16
ticks, each 1/64 of a second long, resulting in a quarter-second
delay before the next command executes.

The VT125 terminal's time delay is dependent on terminal power
supply (50 or 60 Hertz).
An integral number of frame times
(1/50th or 1/60th seconds) is used with the ReGIS S(T) command.
Existing VT125 applications with delays specified have a slightly
longer time delay for the S(T) command.

Maximum Wait Time - The Professional provides a longer
maximum screen time delay period than that of the VT125 terminal.
On the Professional, the S(T) command's tick count is stored as a
word, allowing modulo 65536 interpretation and providing a
maximum delay of about 17 minutes per command.
D.3.6.2

On a VT125 terminal, the tick count is stored in a byte and is
interpreted modulo 256 for a maximum delay of about 4 seconds.
Therefore, applications with S(T) command values larger than 255
invoke a longer delay when running on the Professional.

D.3. 7

Report Features

Report Error - The ReGIS instruction
set
on
the
Professional contains a report-error instruction.
The VT125
terminal does not have this instruction.
Applications software
written for the VT125 is not effected by this added feature.
D.3.7.1

D-16

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
D.3.7.2 Unimplemented Reports Response - On the Professional,
a
command requesting a
report that is not implemented (i.e. not
defined for the specified keyletter)
returns a carriage-return
character to indicate an empty report. Report requests are made
through the ReGIS report (R) command.
On the VT125 terminal,
there is no response to a request for an unimplemented report.

0.3.8

Non-Supported VT125 Capabilities

D.3.8.1 No VT105 Emulation - The Professional does not provide a
VT105 emulation mode. A VT125 terminal can emulate the VT105.

D.3.8.2 No DECwriter Data Transfer - The Professional does not
support transfer of DECwriter descriptor data to a file on the
host computer. A VT125 terminal transfers such data with the
media copy (MC) command, but on the Professional, this command is
ignored.

D.3.8.3 Additional Monitor Support - The Professional supports
only one monitor at a time,
either a monochrome or a color
monitor. A VT125 terminal has provision to support separately
controlled images on a main and an external monitor.
An
application that displays two separate images on the VT125's
monitors
will
have
those
images
superimposed
on
the
Professional's monitor.

D.3.8.4 Scaling "Zoom"
Not
Implemented - The
Professional
terminal hardware does not provide image scaling, also known as
the "nondestructive zoom." This effect, done with the ReGIS
screen-scale (S(S)) command and a new scaling constant, permitted
enlargement (2X zoom) and shrinking of display image.

D.3.8.5 No Custom Writing Controls (Input Map) - Custom writing
with the ReGIS custom-writing (W(W)) command is not implemented
on the Professional. Applications that use custom writing are
executed in the current writing mode,
rather than in the
user-specified custom writing mode.

D-17

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT125 REGIS
D.3.8.6 No Concurrent Display of Graphics and ReGIS Text Mode The Professional does not support the simultaneous display of
graphics images with the ReGIS text that generates those images.
While
such a capability exists on a VT125 terminal,
the
Professional, which does not permit independent scrolling of text
and
graphics
images,
ignores
requests
for simultaneous
graphics/ReGIS code display. On a VT125 terminal, concurrent
display is achieved through the DCS 2 p and DCS 3 p control
strings.

D.4

PROFESSIONAL REGIS VERSUS VT240 REGIS

ReGIS on the Professional is fully compatible
interpreter in the VT241, revision level 2.1.

with

the

ReGIS

The VT240 has a two-plane bitmap,
compared to a three-plane
bit-map on the Professional. On the VT240 both text and graphics
are written to both planes. On the Professional, you can write
text to one plane and graphics to another. On the Professional
you can use all three planes for graphics to obtain more colors.
On a VT240 text is always written in replace mode, that is text
will overwrite any graphics occupying the character cell display.
On the Professional,
text is written to plane 3 and ReGIS
graphics are written to planes 1 and 2 (by default). Thus text
only overwrites any graphics occupying the character cell in
plane 3.
The net effect is that text overlays any graphics on
the screen.
Further, the "Erase in Line" and "Erase in Display" control
sequences
will
also erase graphics on the VT240.
On a
Professional, these control sequences only erase the text display
in plane 3, not the graphics in planes 1 and 2.

D.4.1

Image Distortion Factors

The Professional's 960 x 240 pixel display density provides a
2.5-to-1 pixel-aspect ratio.
The VT240 has a 800 x 240 pixel
display density with an odd-y simulation. Both the Professional
and VT240 allow dimensions to be mapped without distortion.

D-18

APPENDIX E
VT-52 COMPATIBLE SEQUENCES

Table E-1 summarizes the VT-52
sequences are ANSI-incompatible
compatibility.

Table E-1
Summary of VT52-Compatible Sequences

Name and Mnemonic (by Functional Group)
ANSl/VT52 Compatibility ...................... .
ANSI mode (DECANM)
Cursor Positioning ............................ .
Cursor Up
Cursor Down
Cursor Right
Cursor Left
Cursor to Home
Direct Cursor Address
reverse Linefeed
Auxiliary Keypad Character Selection ............ .
Keypad Application Mode
Keypad Numeric Mode
Character Sets and Selection ................... .
Enter Graphics Mode
Exit Graphics Mode
Erasing ..................................... .
Erase to End of Line
Erase to End of Screen
Printing ..................................... .
Auto Print
Print Controller
Print Cursor Line
Print Screen
Reports ..................................... .
Identify

E-1

compatible sequences.
These
and are provided for backward

This appendix describes the VT52-compatible sequences
by the Professional.

recognized

Your application can use VT52-compatible sequences if it is
operating in VT52 mode.
VT52 mode is ·available through a
PRO/Communications menu selection.
You can also select VT52 mode
from VT100 and VT200 modes by using the ANSI sequence documented
in Section 3.5 (CSI ?
2 1).
VT52-compatible sequences are
DIGITAL-private sequences,
and are not ANSI compatible.
Future
DIGITAL equipment may not accept ANSI-incompatible sequences.
Therefore, you should not use VT52-compatible sequences in new
software.
Programmable and Setup features and modes selected in ANSI mode
are also in effect in VT52 mode.
However, usually you cannot
change these features and modes in VT52 mode.
In VT52 mode,
you
can select only three modes with sequences: ANSI mode (DECANM),
and the two auxiliary keypad modes -- keypad application mode and
keypad numeric mode.

NOTE
When you reset the PRO/Communications terminal
emulator,
the Professional is reset to whatever
ANSI-compatible emulation mode you have saved as
your default.

E.1

ANSl/VT52 COMPATIBILITY

When in VT52 mode you cannot set or reset most Professional modes
and features.
You must switch to ANSI mode for that purpose.
Once selected in ANSI mode, the states of modes and features are
maintained when you switch back to VT52 mode.
Select ANSI
(compatibility) mode by using the following sequence.

DECANM

Enter ANSI Mode
1/11 3/12
ESC
<

The Professional interprets all subsequent sequences according to
ANSI
standards X3.64-1979 and X3.41-1974.
The VT52 escape
sequences described in the balance of this appendix are not
recognized and are ignored by the Professional.

E-2

CURSOR POSITIONING

E.2

CURSOR POSITIONING

NOTE
You must select the margins for VT52 mode in ANSI
mode
(VT100 or VT200 mode),
as indicated in
Section 3.5.
If you do not select margins,
the
Professional
uses the complete screen.
The
cursor's home position is dependent on the margin
selection.

Cursor Up
1/11 4/1
ESC
A
Moves cursor up one line in same column.
margin.

Cursor stops at top

Cursor Down
1/11 4/2
ESC
B
Moves cursor down one line in same column.
bottom margin.

Cursor stops at

Cursor Right
1/11 4/3
ESC
c
Moves cursor one column to right.

Cursor stops at right margin.

Cursor Left
1/11 4/4
ESC
D
Moves cursor one column to left.

E-3

Cursor stops at left margin.

CURSOR POSITIONING

Cursor to Home
1/11 4/8
ESC
H

Moves cursor to home position, which is dependent on margin
selection.
Direct Cursor Address
1/11 5/9
ESC
Y

line

column

Moves cursor to specified line and column.
Line and column
numbers are ASCII characters whose codes are calculated by adding
the numerical line or column number (in octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal notation) to 37 (if octal), or 31 (if decimal), or lF
(if hexadecimal).
For example, line 1 and column 8 (decimal) are
decimal code values 32 and 39, respectively.

Reverse Linefeed
1/11 4/9
ESC
I

Moves cursor up one line in same column.
margin, screen performs scroll-down.

E.3

If cursor is at top

AUXILIARY KEYPAD CHARACTER SELECTION

The auxiliary keypad transmits to the application either numeric
characters or control
(application)
functions.
Select keypad
application mode to generate control functions.
Select keypad
numeric mode to generate numeric characters.
See Table E-2 for
the codes generated by the keypad.
Select the keypad mode by
using the following sequences.
Select Keypad Application Mode
1/11 3/13
ESC

Keypad transmits control codes to application.

E-4

AUXILIARY KEYPAD CHARACTER SELECTION

ESC

transmits characters that
period, and minus sign
on ri.ain

match

the

numeric,

rd.

Table E-2
Codes Generated by Auxiliary Keypad Keys (VT52 Mode)
Key

t(eypad Numeric Mode

l<eypad Appl1cal!on Mode

3/0
0

1 /11

3/15

7/0

ESC

3/1

1/11

3/15

ESC

7 /1
q

7/2

3/2
2

1 /11

3/15

ESC

3/3
3

1/11

3/15

7/3

ESC

3/4
4

I /11

3/15

7/4

ESC

3/5
5

1/i1

3/15

7/5

ESC

3/6
6

1 /11

3/15

7/6

ESC

3/7

1/11

3/15

ESC

7/7
w

3/8

I /11

3jl 5

ESC

7/8
x

3/9

i /11

3/15

7/9

ESC

2/13

1 /11

3/i5

6/13(A)

- (minus)

ESC

2/12

1/11

3/15

, (comma)

ESC

6/12(A)
I

2/14

1/11

3/15

6/14

, (periolj)

ESC

0/13

1 /11

3/15

ESC

4/13
M

1/11

5/0

ESC

Enter(B)

PF1

or 0/13

0/10

1/11

5/0
p

ESC

E-5

comma,

AUXILIARY KEYPAD CHARACTER SELECTION
Table E-2 (Cont.)
Codes Generated oy Auxiliary Keypad Keys (VT52 Mode)
Key

Keypad Numenc Mode

Keypad Appl1cat10n Mode

1/11
ESC

5/1

1/11
ESC

5/1

PF2

1/11
ESC

5/2

1/11
ESC

5/2

PF3

1/11
ESC

5/3 (A)

PF4

R
5/3

A. You cannot generate these sequences on a VT52 terminal.
B

In keypad numeric mode. ENTER generates the same codes as RETURN. You can change the code generated
by RETURN with the Linefeed/New Line Mode. When reset. the Linefeed/New Line Mode causes RETURN to
generate a single control character (CR). When set. the mode causes RETURN to generate two control characters (CR.LF)

E.4

CHARACTER SETS AND SELECTION

In VT52 mode, the Professional maps the ASCII Graphics Set into
GL by default.
You can also map the DEC Special Graphics set
into GL, by using the Enter Graphics Mode sequence.
On a VT52
terminal, the VT52 Graphics Mode character set is used instead of
the DEC Special Graphics set.
See Table E-3 for a comparison of
these two sets.
The VT52 Graphics Mode character set is not
available either in VT52 mode on the Professional, or on a VT102
terminal when it is emulating a VT52 terminal.
Use the following
sequences to map DEC Special Graphics into GL and to return to
the default mapping (ASCII Graphics in GL).

Enter Graphics Mode
1/11 4/6
ESC
F
Designate DEC Special Graphics set as Gl and invoke Gl into GL.

Exit Graphics Mode
1/11 4/7
ESC
G
Designate ASCII Graphics set as GO and invoke GO into
selects the default character set into GL.

E-6

GL.

This

CHARACTER SETS AND SELECTION
Table E-3
Comparison of ASCII Graphics, DEC Special Graphics and VT52 Graphics Mode Character Sets
ASCII Graphics

DEC Special Graphics

VT52 Graphics
Mode

Key
5/15
6/00
6/01

Blank

Diamond

Reserved

Checkerboard

Solid rectangle

6/02

Horizontal tab

6/03

Form Feed

6/04

<il

Carriage return

6/05

Linefeed

6/06

Degree sign

6/07

Plus/minus sign

6/08

'I_

New line

Right arrow

6/09

"'"

6/10
6/11

6/12

Vertical tab

Ellipsis (dots)

Lower-right corner

Divide by

Upper-right corner

Down arrow

Upper-left corner

Bar at scan 0

Lower-left corner

Bar at scan 1

6/13

6/14

Crossing lines

Bar at scan 2

6/15

Horizontal line-scan 1

Bar at scan 3

7/00

Horizontal line-scan 3

Bar at scan 4

7/01

Horizontal line-scan 5

Bar at scan 5

Horizontal line-scan 7

Bar at scan 6

Horizontal line-scan 9

Bar at scan 7

Left'T'

Subscript O

Right 'T'

Subscript 1

7/02
7/03

7/04
7/05

7/06

Bottom "T"

Subscript 2

7/07

Top 'T'

Subscript 3

7/08

Vertical bar

Subscript 4

7/09

:""'.

Less than or equal to

Subscript 5

7/10

2'.:

Greater than or equal to

Subscript 6

7/11

Subscript 7

7/12

-;i

Not equal to

Subscript 8

7/13

UK pound sign

Subscript 9

Centered dot

Paragraph

7/14

E-7

ERASING
E.5

ERASING

Erasing removes characters from the screen.
Erased characters
are lost. Erase characters by using the following sequences.
Erase to End of Line
1/11 4/11

ESC

Erases all characters from the cursor to the end of the current
line, including the cursor position. The cursor does not move.
Erase to End of Screen
1/11 4/10

ESC

Erases all characters from the cursor to the end of the screen,
including the cursor position. The cursor does not move.

E.6

PRINTING

The Professional has a serial printer interface for local
printing.
The application can select text mode print operations
by using the two sequences documented below.
NOTE

These sequences are for text mode only and may
not
be used to reproduce the graphics-mode
content of the display.
A line of double-height characters print as two identical lines
of single-width characters.
Double-width characters print as
single-width characters on a single
line.
No
character
attributes are preserved.
Before selecting a print operation, check the printer status by
using the printer status report (DSR) in ANSI mode. Do not
select a print operation if the serial printer is not ready to
print.
If the printer is unavailable or busy, the print request
will be assumed completed.
Select print operations by using the following sequences.

E-8

PRINTING
Auto Print
1/11 5/14

ESC
Turns on auto print. A display line prints after you move the
cursor off the line, using a linefeed, form feed, or vertical tab
(also transmitted to the printer). The line also prints during
an auto wrap. Auto wrap lines end with CR, LF.
1/11 5/15

ESC
Turns off auto print.
Print Controller
1/11 5/7

ESC

Turns on print controller. The Professional transmits received
characters
to
the
printer without displaying them.
The
Professional does not insert or delete spaces, or provide
delimiters, or select the printer character set.
1/11 5/8

ESC

Turns off printer controller.
Print Cursor Line
1/11 5/13

ESC

]

Prints the display line with the cursor.
The cursor position
does not change.
The print-cursor-line sequence is completed
when the line prints.
Print Screen
1/11 5/6

ESC

Prints the screen display.
In ANSI mode, use printer extent mode (DECPEX) to select
the full screen or the scrolling region to be printed.
E-9

either
Select

PRINTING

the scrolling region
by
using
the
set-top-margins
and
set-bottom-margins (DECSTBM) sequence. The print-screen sequence
is completed when the screen prints.

E.6.1

Reports

The Professional transmits reports in response to
program
requests.
The Professional generates only one report in VT52
mode.
The report requests and response are as follows.
Identify
1/11 5/10
ESC
Z
The application requests the Professional to identify itself.
1/11 2/15 5/10
ESC
I
Z
The Professional identifies itself as a VT102 emulating a VT52.

E-10

INDEX

-A-

Active screen position, 3-25
ADDTNL OPTIONS key, 2-18
Alignment, screen (DECALN), 3-67
Alternate keypad
see Keypad, auxiliary
ANSI compatibility
enter ANSI mode (DECANM), E-2
in native mode, 1-6
in VT100 mode, 1-9
ANSI standards, 1-11
ANSI-compatible sequences
detailed, 3-14
overview, 3-9
summary list, 3-11
APC (application program command),
3-7
APC, application program command
strings, 4-23
APC, Application program control,
4-1
Application control (APC) string
format of, 4-24
Application environments
overview, 1-4
Application program command (APC)
strings
and PRO/Communications, 4-23
definition of, 4-23
enabling, 4-23
functions performed by, 4-23
sending data to a local task
with, 4-2 3
spawning a local task with,
4-23
Application program control (APC),
4-1
ASCII
as subset of DEC Multinational,
1-19
code table, 1-14
ASCII Graphics
character set, defined, 1-19
relation to standard keys, 2-5
selecting, 3-38

Attributes
character (DECSCA), 3-45
character (SGR), 3-45
device<primary (DA), 3-58
device<secondary (DA2), 3-58
line (DECDHL,DECSWL,DECDWL),
3-48
Auto (key) repeat, 2-27
mode (DECARM), 3-33
Auto print (VT52 mode), E-8
Auto XON/XOFF, 2-25
Auto-print (MC), 3-54
Auto-wrap mode (DECAWM), 3-30
Auxiliary keypad
see Keypad, auxiliary

-BBackspace
BS key (VT100 mode), 2-4, 2-18
character (BS), 2-15, 3-5
Bell, 2-27
character (BEL), 2-27, 3-5
levels of, 2-27
7-bit, 8-bit, see:
Character sets
Code table(s)
Control characters
Control functions
Graphic characters
Bitmap plane, 1-3
Bits per character, 1-14
Blink attribute, 3-45
in text or graphics mode, C-1
Bold attribute, 3-45
BREAK key, 2-18
BS
see Backspace

-cCO and Cl control characters
see Control characters
Cancel
CANCEL key, 2-18
character (CAN), 3-5
within a sequence, 3-10

Index-1

INDEX

Caps Lock, 2-6
Carriage return
character (CR), 3-5
RETURN key
effect of LNM sequence on,
2-15, 3-31
Character
erase in (ECH), 3-49
Character attributes (DECSCA),
3-45
Character attributes (SGR), 3-45
Character bits
see Bits per character
Character cells, 1-2
Character sets
available on Professional, 1-19
default set, 1-19
relation to GL and GR codes,
3-4, 3-38
relation to standard keys, 2-5
selecting, 3-38
selecting (VT52 mode), E-6
technical, 1-19
Character, control
see Control characters
Character, graphic (display)
see Graphic characters
Code extensions (7-bit)
(for 8-bit control characters)
announcers for, 3-17
listed, 3-4
use of, 1-27, 1-28
Code tables
7-bit (ASCII), overview, 1-14
8-bit, overview, 1-16
column/row convention, 1-14
Coding standards (text mode),
1-11
Color
see Graphics mode
Color specifier
in sixel data, 4-14
Column mode (DECCOLM), 3-29
Communications, see
setup characteristics
Terminal emulation
Compatibility level
differences between 1 and 2,
3-14
Level 1 and Level 2, 3-14

Compatiblity level
selecting with DECSCL, 3-14
Compose
effect of RIS, 3-62
indicator, 2-7
sequence table, 2-11
sequences, 2-7
COMPOSE CHARACTER key, 2-7
Control characters
7-bit code extensions for, 3-4
7-bit, keys used to generate,
2-15
CO, Cl, definition of, 1-16
documentation convention for,
3-4
in 7- and 8-bit environments,
1-27, 1-28, 3-17
response of Professional to,
3-4
within a sequence, 3-10
Control functions
documentation convention, 2-1,
3-4
introduction to, 1-26
Control sequence
DECSCL, select compatibility
level, 3-14
Control sequences
see Sequences, escape/control
Control strings
defined, 4-1
types of, 4-1
CORE Graphics Library, 1-1, 1-3,
1-6
CPR (cursor position report),
3-58
CR
see Carriage return
CSI (control-sequence introducer),
1-28, 3-7
CTRL key
to generate control characters,
2-15
CUB (cursor backward), 3-25
CUD (cursor down), 3-25
CUF (cursor forward), 3-25
CUP (cursor position), 3-25
Cursor
addressing (VT52 mode), E-3
backward (CUB), left, 3-25
control keys, 2-21

Index-2

INDEX

Cursor (Cont.)
down (CUD), 3-25
down (VT52 mode), E-3
enable mode (DECTCEM), 3-28
forward (CUF), right, 3-25
home position, 3-24
home position {VT52 mode), E-3
in text or graphics mode, 3-28,
C-1
key mode (DECCKM), 3-34
left (VT52 mode), E-3
position (CUP), 3-25
position report (CPR), 3-58
positioning, 3-25
positioning (VT52 mode), E-3
restore (DECRC), 3-25
right (VT52 mode), E-3
save (DECSC), 3-25
underline, C-1
up (CUU), 3-25
up (VT52 mode), E-3
CUU (cursor up), 3-25
-D-

DA (primary device attributes),
3-58
DA2 (secondary device attributes),
3-58
Data processing mode, 2-7
DCl (device control 1, XON), 2-25,
3-5
DC3 (device control 3, XOFF),
2-25, 3-5
DCH (delete character), 3-52
DCS (device control string), 3-7
DCS, Device control strings, 4-1
Dead diacritical keys
equivalent ASCII characters,
2-10
use in compose sequences, 2-7
DEC Multinational
character set, defined, 1-19
relation to compose sequences,
2-7
relation to standard keys, 2-5
selecting, 3-38
DEC Special Graphics
character set, defined, 1-20
relation to standard keys, 2-5
selecting, 3-38

DEC Supplemental Graphics
character set, defined, 1-19
relation to standard keys, 2-5
selecting, 3-38
DECALN (screen alignment display),
3-67
DECANM
enter ANSI mode, E-2
enter VT52 mode, 3-67
DECARM (auto repeat mode), 2-27
DECARM (Autorepeat mode), 3-33
DECAWM (auto-wrap mode), 3-30
DECCKM (cursor key mode), 3-34
DECCOLM (column mode), 3-29
DECDHL (double-height line), 3-48
DECDLD
device control string, 4-4
for down-line loading DRCS,
4-10
parameters, 4-10
DECDWL (double-width line), 3-48
DECHCP (print screen), 3-57
DECIO (identify terminal), 3-58
DECINLM (interlace mode), 3-66
DECKPAM (keypad application mode),
3-35
DECKPNM (keypad numeric mode),
3-35
DECOM (origin mode), 3-24
DECPEX (printer extent), 3-56
DECPFF (print termination char.),
3-57
DECRC (restore cursor), 3-25
DECSC (save cursor), 3-25
DECSCA (select character
attribute), 3-45
DECSCL
uses of, 3-14
DECSCL, select compatibility
level
control sequence, 3-14
DECSCLM (scroll mode), 3-23
DECSCNM (screen mode), 3-31
DECSED (selective erase in
display), 3-49
DECSEL (selective erase in line),
3-49
DECSTBM (set top/bot. margins),
3-23
DECSTR
soft reset, 3-62

Index-3

INDEX

DECSWL (single-width line), 3-48
DECTCEM (cursor enable mode),
3-28
DECUDK
device control string for user
defined keys, 4-17
device control string format,
4-17
Default
and setup characteristics, 3-17
character set, 1-19
and standard keys, 2-5
output (color) map, C-1
response to character codes,
1-28
states documented, 1-6, 1-9,
3-14
states from RIS sequence, 3-62
Delete
character (DCH), 3-52
line (DL), 3-52
DELETE key, 2-15
Designate graphic character set,
3-38
Device
control 1 (DC1, XON), 2-25, 3-5
control 3 (DC3, XOFF), 2-25,
3-5
control string (DCS), 3-7
primary attributes (DA), 3-58
secondary attributes (DA2),
3-58
status report (DSR), 3-58
Device control string
DECUDK, 4-17
sixel graphics, 4-13
Device control strings
uses of, overview, 4-2
Device control strings (DCS), 4-1
Direct cursor address (VT52 mode),
E-3
DL (delete line), 3-52
DO key, 2-18
Double-height line (DECDHL), 3-48
Double-width line (DECDWL), 3-48
Down-line loadable character set
see DRCS
Down-line loading
DRCS, 4-10
DP mode
see Data processing mode

DRCS
and DECDLD device control
sequence, 4-4
baseline of, 4-9
balding of, 4-9
breaking character into sixels,
4-7
buffer, 4-4
cell matrix size, 4-4
coding of sixels into ASCII
strings, 4-7
column mode, 4-4
controlling intensity of, 4-9
controlling intra-character
spacing, 4-9
defined, 4-4
design considerations, 4-9
designing a character, 4-4
directions for designing a
character, 4-6
down-line loading, 4-10
full versus text cell, 4-4
lost when power-off, 4-4
maintaining symmetry, 4-9
parameters used with, 4-4
sample character, 4-6
underscoring, 4-9
DSR (device status report), 3-58
Dynamically redefinable character
sets (DRCS)
see DRCS

-EEBO
see Extended bitmap option
ECH (erase character), 3-49
Echo
see Local echo
ED (erase in display), 3-49
Editing (ICH, DCH, IL, DL), 3-52
Editing keys, keypad
see Keypad, editing
Eight-bit, see:
Character sets
Code table(s)
Control characters
Control functions
Graphic characters
EL (erase in line), 3-49

Index-4

INDEX

Emulation
see Terminal emulation
Enable/disable cursor (DECTCEM),
3-28
ENQ (enquiry), 3-5
ENTER key
effect of LNM, 2-23
Erasable attribute, 3-45
Erase character (ECH), 3-49
Erase in display (ED), 3-49
Erase in line (EL), 3-49
Erasing (VT52 mode), E-8
Error recovery
for control functions, 3-10
Errors and bell signal, 2-27
Escape
character (ESC), 1-27, 2-15,
3-5
within a sequence, 3-10
ESC key (VT100 mode), 2-4, 2-18
sequence
see Sequences, escape/control
EXIT key, 2-18
Extended bitmap option (EBO), 1-3,
C-1, D-9

-FFeatures
see Setup characteristics
FF (form feed), 3-5
FIND key, 2-21
Function keys
see Keys

Graphics mode
color, 1-3, C-1, D-14, D-17
compared to text mode, 1-2
cursor, 3-28, C-1
effect of RIS, 3-62
in native mode, 1-6
in terminal emulation, 1-10,
D-9
mixing text and graphics, 1-3,
C-1, D-14
output map
default state, 3-62, C-1

-HHELP key, 2-18
HLS
universal color coordinate
system, 4-14
Hold Screen indicator, 2-18
HOLD SCREEN key, 2-18
Home position, 3-24
VT52 mode, E-3
HT (horizontal tabulation)
see Tabulation
HTS (horizontal tab set)
see Tabulation
HVP (horiz./vert. position), 3-25

-I-

-GGO, Gl, G2, G3, 3-38
GIDIS, 1-1, 1-3
GL and GR graphic characters
see Graphic characters
Graphic characters
composed, 2-7
definition of, 1-14
GL, GR characters defined,
1-16
in 7- and 8-bit environments,
1-28
relation to standard keys, 2-5
response of Professional to,
3-4

ICH (insert character), 3-52
Identify
terminal (DECIO), 3-58
terminal (VT52 mode), E-10
IL (insert line), 3-52
Index
I ND, 3 - 7 , 3 - 2 5
reverse (RI), 3-7, 3-25
Indicator
Compose, 2-7
Hold Screen, 2-18
Lock, 2-6
Wait, 2-25, 3-33
Input (color) map
see Graphics mode
Insert
character (DCH), 3-52
INSERT HERE key, 2-21
Insert line (IL), 3-52

Index-5

INDEX

Insertion-replacement mode (!RM),
3-53
Interlace mode (DECINLM), 3-66
INTERRUPT key, 2-18
Invoke graphic character set,
3-38
IRM (insertion-replacement mode),
3-53
ISO standards, 1-11
-J-

Keys (Cont.)
office/data-processing modes,
2-7
standard, 2-5
to generate control characters,
2-15
to restore screen, 2-28
top row function, 2-18
used in various modes of
operation, 2-4
used in VT100 mode, 2-18

Jump scroll
see Scrolling

-L-

-KKAM (keyboard action mode), 2-25,
3-33
Keyboard
action mode (KAM), 2-25, 3-33
default states (effect of RIS),
3-62
lock/unlock, 2-25, 3-33, 3-62
Keyclick, 2-25
Keypad, auxiliary
application mode (DECKPAM),
3-35
application mode (VT52 mode),
E-4
effect on cursor key codes,
3-34
key codes, ANSI/VT52, 2-23
numeric mode (DECKPNM), 3-35
numeric mode (VT52 mode), E-4
Keypad, editing
cursor key codes, ANSI/VT52,
2-21
cursor key mode (DECCKM), 3-34
editing key codes, 2-21
Keys
auxiliary keypad, 2-23
compose sequences, 2-7
cursor control, 2-21
dead diacritical, 2-7
editing keypad, 2-21
function
and P/OS, 2-18, 2-21
documentation convention, 2-1
invalid and bell signal, 2-27
names of key groupings, 2-2

Level 1
in emulation mode, 1-5
in native mode, 1-5
Level 2
in emulation mode, 1-5
in native mode, 1-5
LF
see Linefeed
Line
attributes, 3-48
delete (DL), 3-52
doubla height (DECDHL), 3-48
double-width (DECDWL), 3-48
erase in (EL), 3-49
insert (IL), 3-52
next (NEL), 3-7, 3-25
single width (DECSWL), 3-48
line
selective erase in (DECSED),
3-49
selective erase in (DECSEL),
3-49
Line characteristics
see setup characteristics
Linefeed
character (LF), 2-15, 3-5, 3-31
LF key (VTlOO mode), 2-4, 2-18
/new line mode (LNM), 3-31
reverse (VT52 mode), E-3
LNM
see Linefeed/new lin~ mode
Local echo (SRM sequence), 3-34
Lock indicator, 2-6
LOCK key, 2-6
Lock shift control functions
LSO (SI), LSl (SO), 3-5, 3-38

Index-6

INDEX
Lock shift control functions
(Cont.)
LS2, LS3, LSlR, LS2R, LS3R,
3-38
Lock/unlock keyboard, 2-25, 3-33,
3-62

OSC, operating system control
strings, 4-22
Output (color) map
see Graphics mode

-M-

MAIN SCREEN key, 2-18
Margin
margin bell, 2-27
set top/bottom margin (DECSTBM),
3-23
MC (media copy), 3-54
Mode selection (SM, RM) sequences
and Setup characteristics, 3-17
ANSI-standardized, 3-21
DEC-private, 3-21
in VT52 mode, E-2
-N-

Native mode
definition of, 1-6
NEL (next line), 3-7, 3-25
New line mode
see Linefeed/new line mode
Next line (NEL), 3-7, 3-25
NEXT SCREEN key, 2-21
Non-erasible attribute, 3-45
NUL (null), 3-5
Numeric keypad
see Keypad, auxiliary

-oOffice mode, 2-7
OPC, Operating system command,
4-1
Operating system command (OPC),
4-1
Operating system command (OSC),
3-7
Operating system control (OSC)
strings
definition of, 4-22
Origin mode (DECOM), 3-24
osc (operating system command),
3-7

-P-

Parameters
in mode selection sequences,
3-17
Pixels, 1-2
PM {privacy message), 3-7
PM, Privacy message, 4-1
PM, privacy message, 4-22
PREV SCREEN key, 2-21
Print
cursor line (MC), 3-54
cursor line {VT52 mode), E-8
screen (DECHCP), 3-57
screen (MC), 3-54
screen (VT52 mode), E-8
termination character (DECPFF),
3-57
PRINT SCREEN key, 2-18, 3-54
with Control key, 2-18
with Shift key, 2-18
Printer
controller {VT52 mode), E-8
controller mode (MC), 3-54
effect on RIS, 3-62
extent (DECPEX), 3-56
form feed mode (DECPFF), 3-57
status report (DSR), 3-58
Printing, 3-54
text or graphics, 1-2, 3-54,
C-1
VT52 mode, E-8
Privacy message (PM), 3-7, 4-1
Privacy message (PM) control
strings
definition of, 4-22
PRO/BASIC, 1-1, 1-3, 1-6
PRO/Communications, see
setup characteristics
Terminal emulation
Programmable keys
see User defined keys

Index-7

INDEX
-R-

ReGIS, 1-1, 1-10
command levels in, 4-2
device control string, 4-2
entering ReGIS mode, 4-2
exiting ReGIS mode, 4-2
ReGIS graphics
defined, 4-2
REMOVE key, 2-21
Repeat
see Auto (key) repeat
Reports
DSR, CPR, DA, DECIO, 3-58
VT52 mode, E-10
Reset
mode (RM), 3-17
soft (DECSTR), 3-62
terminal emulator, 3-14, 3-62
to initial state (RIS), 3-62
Restore cursor (DECRC), 3-25
RESUME key, 2-18
RETURN key
see Carriage return
Reverse
index (RI), 3-7, 3-25
linefeed (VT52 mode), E-3
video (character basis), 3-45
video (full screen, DECSCNM),
3-31
RGB
universal color coordinate
system, 4-14
RI (reverse index), 3-7, 3-25
RIS (reset to initial state),
3-62
RM (reset mode), 3-17

-sSave cursor (DECSC), 3-25
Screen
alignment (DECALN), 3-67
blanking, 2-28
mode (DECSCNM), 3-31
width (DECCOLM), 3-29
Scrolling
graphics considerations, C-1,
D-13
region (DECSTBM), 3-23
scroll mode (DECSCLM), 3-23

SCS (select character set), 3-38
Select character attribute
(DECSCA), 3-45
Select compatibility level
(DECSCL)
definition of, 3-14
Select graphic rendition (SGR),
3-45
SELECT key, 2-21
Selective erase in display
(DECSED), 3-49
Selective erase in line (DECSEL),
3-49
Send-receive mode (SRM), 3-34
Sequences, escape and control
ANSI-compatible, detailed, 3-14
ANSI-compatible, summary, 3-11
overview, 1-26, 3-9
VT52-compatible, detailed, E-2
VT52-compatible, summary, E-1
Set mode (SM), 3-17
Set top/bottom margins (DECSTBM),
3-23
SET-UP key, 2-18
to unlock keyboard, 2-25
Setup characteristics
and mode selection sequences
comparison table, 3-19
overview, 1-5, 3-17
Communications, 3-19
P/OS, 3-19
Seven-bit, see:
Character sets
Code table(s)
Control characters
Control functions
Graphic characters
SGR (select graphic rendition),
3-45
Shift in/out (SI, SO), 3-5, 3-38
SHIFT key, 2-6
Shift-lock, 2-6
SI (shift in), 3-5, 3-38
Single shift control functions
SS2, SS3, 3-7, 3-38
Single-width line (DECSWL), 3-48
Sixel control characters
color, 4-13
graphics carriage return, 4-13
graphics new line, 4-13
parameter separator, 4-13
Index-8

•

INDEX
Sixel control characters (Cont.)
repeat, 4-13
Sixel data
control characters in, 4-13
data characters in, 4-13
range of characters, 4-13
Sixel graphics
and bitmap images, 4-13
device control string, 4-13
supported printers, 4-13
Sixel printers, 4-13
Sixels
and DRCS characters, 4-7
SM (set mode), 3-17
Smooth scroll
see Scrolling
SO (shift out), 3-5, 3-38
Soft character set
see DRCS
Special Characters/Line Drawing
see DEC Special Graphics
SRM (send-receive mode), 3-34
SS2 (single shift G2), 3-7, 3-38
SS3 (single shift G3), 3-7, 3-38
ST (string terminator), 3-7
Standard keys, 2-5
Standards, coding, 1-11
SUB (substitute), 3-5
within a sequence, 3-10
Supplemental Graphics
see DEC Supplemental Graphics
-T-

TAB key
see Tabulation
Tabulation
horizontal tab (HT), 2-15, 3-5
horizontal tab set (HTS), 3-7,
3-29
TAB key, 2-15
tabulation clear (TBC), 3-29
vertical tab (VT), 3-5
TBC (tabulation clear), 3-29
Technical Character Set, 1-19
Terminal driver, 1-6
Terminal emulation
and 7- or 8-bit codes, 1-28,
3-17
keys used in, 2-2
overview, 1-6, 1-9

Terminal emulation (Cont.)
ReGIS in, 1-1
reset emulator, 3-62
setup characteristics
see setup characteristics
VT100 graphics mode
compared to VT125 terminal,
D-9
VT100 mode, 1-9
compared to VT102 terminal,
D-1
definition of, 1-9
ReGIS, 1-10
VT200 7-bit mode, 1-9
VT200 8-bit mode, 1-9
VT200 graphics mode
compared to VT125 terminal,
D-9
VT200, 7-bit controls, 1-11
VT200,8-bit controls, 1-11
VT52 mode, 1-9
see VT52 mode
Tests and adjustments
DECALN, 3-67
DECTST, 3-11
Text and graphics, mixed, 1-3,
C-1, D-14
Text mode
ANSI compatibility
in native mode, 1-6
in VT100 mode, 1-9
compared to graphics mode, 1-2
cursor, 3-28, C-1
description of, 1-11

-uUDK
status report (DSR), 3-58
Underline
attribute, 3-45
cursor, C-1
User defined keys
advice when loading, 4-20
and DECUDK device control
string, 4-17
defined, 4-17
down-line loading, 4-18
example, 4-20
how to clear, 4-17
how to lock, 4-17

Index-9

INDEX
User defined keys (Cont.)
how to program, 4-17
how to use, 4-17

-vVertical tabulation (VT), 3-5
VT100 Line Drawing character set
see DEC Special Graphics
VT100 mode
see Terminal emulation
VT100/125 terminals
compared to VTlOO mode, 1-9
VT102 terminal
compared to VT100 mode, D-1
VT125 terminal
compared to VT100 mode, D-9
compared to VT200 mode, D-9
VT200 mode, 7-bit controls
definition of, 1-11
VT200 mode, 8-bit controls
definition of, 1-11
VT240 terminals
compared to VT200 mode
emulation, 1-11
VT52 Graphics Mode character set,
E-6

VT52 mode
auxiliary keypad codes, 2-23,
E-4
character set selection, E-6
cursor addressing, E-3
cursor control key codes, 2-21
cursor positioning, E-3
DECANM (enter VT52 mode), 3-9,
3-67
definition of, 1-11
erasing, E-8
printing, E-8
relation to VT100 mode, 1-11
reports, E-10
Set-Up features, mode selection,
E-2
VT52-compatible sequences
detailed, E-2
overview, 3-9
summary list, E-1

-wWait indicator, 2-25, 3-33

-xXON/XOFF enable/disable, 2-25

End of Index

Index-10